POS MV V5 Installation And Operation Guide Applanix Manual

Applanix_POS_MV_-_Manual

User Manual:

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 273 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

General Notice
For Our European Union Customers
A New Recycling Program
About This Document
Table of Contents
List of Figures
List of Tables
List of Abbreviations, Synonyms and Symbols
1.0 Introduction
- System Description and Overview
- MV-POSView Controller Software
2.0 Installation
3.0 Interfaces and Data Formats
4.0 System Configuration
5.0 System Operation
6.0 TrueHeave Operation
7.0 Specifications
8.0 Tools and Diagnostics
9.0 Fault Identification

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation

Guide

PUBS-MAN-004291

Revision 4

III

General Notice

Although every care has been taken to ensure that this manual is reliable and accurate, Applanix

Corporation (here after referred to as Applanix) provides it “as is” and without express, implied, or limited

warranty of any kind. In no event shall Applanix be liable for any loss or damage caused by the use of this

manual.

This manual describes the POS MV™ V5 and V5-1 in detail and contains full installation and operating

instructions. This manual is an important part of the system and should remain with the installation.

It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure that there are adequate mounting facilities, and to carefully

plan the component layout. Applanix will not be responsible for damage caused by improper installation

or inadequate environmental conditions.

Applanix reserves the right to change the specifications and information in this document without notice.

The information contained herein is proprietary to Applanix. Release to third parties of this publication or

of information contained herein is prohibited without the prior written consent of Applanix.

Pentium® is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. Microsoft, Windows XP, Windows Vista, and

Windows 7 are trademarks of Microsoft group of companies.

transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written consent of Applanix.

Printed in Canada.

Liability and Safety Information

Important: All cables connected to the POS MV V5 and

POS MV V5-1 equipment shall be constructed of (in order of

preference): a) halogen free, b) low smoke and c) high

temperature materials.

CAUTION

DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING

Ethernet Cable - Applanix supplies a suitable Ethernet cable. However, if supplied by the customer the

cable shall incorporate a braid shield, having at least 90% coverage that has a 360 degree termination at

both connectors, and be rated as CAT5 or better. The RJ45 connectors used in the cable shall also be

shielded.

Serial Cables - Applanix supplies suitable COM port serial cables, each are about 3.6 m (12.0 ft) in

length. If the cables are supplied by the customer each cable shall incorporate a braid shield, having at

least 90% coverage that has a 360 degree termination at the backshells of both connectors.

Power Cord - Applanix ships a specially constructed power cord with its POS MV V5 ac products and is

detailed in Appendix E . Otherwise, the customer is responsible for supplying and using a compliant

power cord. Ensure that the destination country electrical codes are adhered to. Applanix recommends an

ac power cord not exceeding 2 m (6 ½ ft) in length and that can safely handle a maximum of 10 A.

Regulatory Information

Caution: Do not make mechanical or electrical modifications to the

POS MV system or any of their components. Changes or

modifications not expressly approved by Applanix could void the

compliance and negate your authority to operate the product.

Certification was achieved using the following original or

replacement equipment supplied by Applanix: Power Cord, GNSS

antennas, GNSS antenna cables, Ethernet cable, IMU, IMU cable

and RS-232 serial cables.

Notice: POS MV V5 and POS MV V5-1 are not certified to EN

60945 standard and therefore cannot be used for maritime

navigation as defined by EN 60945. POS MV cannot be installed

near bridge-mounted equipment, in close proximity to receiving

antennas, or anywhere it could be capable of interfering with safe

navigation of the ship and with radio-communications.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

Manufacturer's Name:

Manufacturer's Address: 85 Leek Crescent

Richmond Hill, Ontario, Canada L4B 3B3

EC Representative's Name: Applanix Corporation, A Trimble Company

EC Representative's Address: 85 Leek Crescent

Richmond Hill, Ontario, Canada L4B 3B3

Equipment Model Designation: POS MV V5, POS MV V5-1

Equipment Description: POS MV is a fully integrated, turnkey

position and orientation system for Marine

vessels.

Application of Council Directive: 2006/95/EC on the harmonization of the

laws related to Member States relating to electrical equipment designed

for use within certain voltage limits and Council Directive 2004/108/EC

on the approximation of the laws related to Member States relating to

electromagnetic compatibility.

Referenced Safety Standards: Referenced EMC Standards:

EN 60950-1 : 2006 EN 55022 : 2006

EN 55024 : 98 with Amendments

A1:2001 and A2:2003

FCC Section 15.21 Information to the user.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Applanix could void the user's authority to operate

the equipment.

FCC Section 15.105 Information to the user.

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against

harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment

generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with

the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

Industry Canada

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

VCCI

English Translation: This is a Class B product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control

Council for Interference from Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this is used near a

radio or television receiver in a domestic environment, it may cause radio interference. Install

and use the equipment according to the instruction manual.

VII

For Our European Union Customers

A New Recycling Program

Applanix recognizes the importance of minimizing the environmental impacts of our products. We

endeavour to meet your needs, not only when you purchase and use our products, but also when you are

ready to dispose of them. Applanix is actively pursuing, and will continue to pursue, the expanded use of

environmentally friendly materials in all its products. In addition, we have established a convenient and

environmentally friendly recycling program.

As Applanix makes additional recycling facilities available for your use, we will

post their locations and contact information on our recycling instructions Web

page. In the meanwhile see Appendix A, page A-1, for Applanix contact

information.

WEEE is Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment, products that operate on

electrical power.

About This Document

Text Conventions

The following text conventions are used in this manual:

• Emphasize a term - italic font or bold italic font (e.g. ‘An Inertial Frame is’ or ‘An Inertial Frame

is’); a mixture is acceptable but, consistency is preferable

• Referring to another manual or to a file name - italic font (e.g. ‘read the Power Requirements

manual’ or ‘locate the start.exe file’)

• Referring to a placard label - regular font (e.g. ‘the COM (2) connector’)

• Referring to a screen label - bold font (e.g. ‘press the OK button’)

• Path statement - bold font (e.g. ‘select C:\My Computer\ Working Files\.Fields’)

• Menu statement - bold font (e.g. ‘select Insert, AutoText, Closing window menu’ or ‘select

Insert | AutoText | Closing window menu’); a mixture is acceptable but, consistency is

preferable

• Web address statement - bold font (e.g. ‘select http://www.applanix.com from’)

Symbols

The following symbols appear in this manual:

Warning - operating procedures,

practices, etc., which, if not correctly

followed, could result in personal

injury or loss of life

Caution - procedures, practices, etc.,

which, if not correctly followed, could

result in damage or destruction of

equipment, or loss of data

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

sensitive material

Fragile/Breakable

Hint - provides a suggested method

or approach

Electrocution Hazard

Document Number

PUBS-MAN-004291, Revision 4, dated 22-August-2012

Table of Contents

1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................. 1-1

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 1-1

MV-POSVIEW CONTROLLER SOFTWARE ...................................................................................................................... 1-13

2.0 INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................................. 2-1

HANDLING PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................................................................................. 2-1

UNPACKING AND STORAGE ........................................................................................................................................... 2-2

SITE PREPARATION ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-2

INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-4

INSTALLATION PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................................................... 2-24

INSTALLATION CHECKLIST ........................................................................................................................................... 2-32

3.0 INTERFACES AND DATA FORMATS ........................................................................................... 3-1

LAN (ETHERNET) DATA ............................................................................................................................................... 3-1

COM PORTS ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-1

GNSS PORTS ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-23

4.0 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................................... 4-1

POWER-ON ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

FRONT PANEL STATUS LEDS ......................................................................................................................................... 4-2

MV-POSVIEW CONTROLLER PROGRAM ......................................................................................................................... 4-3

POS MV CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................................................... 4-7

INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS SET-UP .................................................................................................................................... 4-13

POWER-OFF ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-24

SAVE SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-26

MAKING CHANGES .................................................................................................................................................... 4-27

MANAGE MULTIPLE CONFIGURATIONS ......................................................................................................................... 4-27

PASSWORD PROTECTION ............................................................................................................................................ 4-27

5.0 SYSTEM OPERATION ................................................................................................................... 5-1

MV-POSVIEW CONTROLLER PROGRAM ......................................................................................................................... 5-1

MONITORING POS MV ............................................................................................................................................... 5-2

DATA LOGGING ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-10

DATA LOGGING – REMOVABLE MEDIA .......................................................................................................................... 5-12

DATA LOGGING - ETHERNET ....................................................................................................................................... 5-15

DATA OUTPUT – ETHERNET ........................................................................................................................................ 5-16

OPERATION WITH GAMS........................................................................................................................................... 5-17

XII

STAND-ALONE OPERATION ......................................................................................................................................... 5-24

6.0 TRUEHEAVE OPERATION ............................................................................................................ 6-1

OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................................................ 6-1

CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................................. 6-1

INITIALIZATION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................................................... 6-1

DATA OUTPUT ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

TRUEHEAVE PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................................................. 6-2

7.0 SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................................................... 7-1

8.0 TOOLS AND DIAGNOSTICS ......................................................................................................... 8-1

GNSS CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................................................... 8-1

GNSS RESET ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-1

GNSS DATA .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-1

DIAGNOSTICS ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-2

REGULAR MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................................................. 8-4

TECHNICAL SUPPORT ................................................................................................................................................... 8-5

9.0 FAULT IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................................................... 9-1

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................................... 9-1

FAULT IDENTIFICATION................................................................................................................................................. 9-3

REMOVE AND REPLACE PROCEDURES............................................................................................................................ 9-19

TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................................................................... 9-25

APPENDIX A TECHNICAL SUPPORT AND SERVICE .................................................................... A-1

APPENDIX B THEORY OF OPERATION .......................................................................................... B-1

APPENDIX C TRAINING .................................................................................................................... C-1

APPENDIX D SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ..................................................................................... D-1

APPENDIX E DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................. E-1

APPENDIX F PATCH TEST ................................................................................................................ F-1

APPENDIX G IP68 CONNECTOR HANDLING ................................................................................. G-1

APPENDIX H POS-GPS TIMING ....................................................................................................... H-1

XIII

List of Figures

Figure 1: Typical POS MV Components ....................................................... 1-2

Figure 2: Heading Measurement without GAMS .......................................... 1-7

Figure 3: Heading Measurement with GAMS ............................................... 1-9

Figure 4: GNSS Antenna .............................................................................. 2-6

Figure 5: Typical IMU Mounting Features ..................................................... 2-8

Figure 6: PCS Rear Panel - POS MV V5 .................................................... 2-10

Figure 7: PCS Rear Panel – POS MV V5-1 ................................................ 2-14

Figure 8: PWR Connector Pin Arrangement ............................................... 2-16

Figure 9: COM Connector Pin Arrangement ............................................... 2-17

Figure 10: PPS Port Signal Sources - Functional Diagram ........................ 2-18

Figure 11: I/O Connector Pin Arrangement ................................................ 2-20

Figure 12: Right-Hand Orthogonal System ................................................. 2-31

Figure 13: $xxGST Sentence Nomenclature ................................................ 3-9

Figure 14: PCS Front and Rear Panels - POS MV V5 ................................. 4-2

Figure 15: POS MV PCS V5-1 PCS Front Panel .......................................... 4-2

Figure 16: POSView POS Internet Address ................................................. 4-6

Figure 17: Configuration Data Refinement ................................................... 4-7

Figure 18: POSView Lever Arms & Mounting Angles Tab ........................... 4-8

Figure 19: POSView Sensor Mounting Tab .................................................. 4-9

Figure 20: Calibration Control Screen ......................................................... 4-10

Figure 21: Controller Tags, Multipath & AutoStart Tab ............................... 4-12

Figure 22: User Time Data Screen ............................................................. 4-12

Figure 23: Input/Output Ports Set-up – COM1............................................ 4-14

Figure 24: Input/Output Ports Set-up – COM3............................................ 4-14

Figure 25: POSView Heave Filter ............................................................... 4-15

Figure 26: Input/Output Ports Set-up – GNSS 1 Interface .......................... 4-16

Figure 27: Input/Output Ports Set-up – GNSS 2 Interface .......................... 4-17

Figure 28: GAMS Solution Status ............................................................... 4-18

Figure 29: POSView GAMS Parameters Setup .......................................... 4-19

Figure 30: POSView GAMS Installation Wizard ......................................... 4-20

Figure 31: POSView Settings Menu, Status and Attitude Panes ................ 4-22

Figure 32: PCS Front and Rear Panels - POS MV V5 ............................... 4-25

XIV

Figure 33: PCS Front Panel – POS MV V5-1 ............................................. 4-26

Figure 34: POSView Controller Password Protection ................................. 4-29

Figure 35: POSView Controller Main Window .............................................. 5-3

Figure 36: POSView User Parameter Accuracy ........................................... 5-6

Figure 37: POSView Navigation Data at Sensors......................................... 5-7

Figure 38: POSView Fault Detection ............................................................ 5-9

Figure 39: POSView Message Log ............................................................. 5-10

Figure 40: Ethernet Logging Control ........................................................... 5-11

Figure 41: USB Logging Control ................................................................. 5-12

Figure 42: Removable Media Bay – POS MV V5 ....................................... 5-12

Figure 43: Removable Media Bay – POS MV V5-1 .................................... 5-13

Figure 44: Ethernet Realtime Output Control.............................................. 5-16

Figure 45: POSView GAMS Solution and Status Pane .............................. 5-17

Figure 46: POSView GAMS Parameters Setup .......................................... 5-23

Figure 47: TrueHeave Functional Block Diagram ......................................... 6-1

Figure 48: POSView Heave Data ................................................................. 6-2

Figure 49: POSView Status and Accuracy Panes ........................................ 6-3

Figure 50: POSView GNSS Data .................................................................. 8-2

Figure 51: POSView Binary Diagnostics ....................................................... 8-3

Figure 52: POS MV V5 Front Panel .............................................................. 9-3

Figure 53: POS MV V5-1 Front Panel ........................................................... 9-4

Figure 54: POSView Fault Detection ............................................................ 9-6

Figure 55: POSView Fault Detection - IMU and GNSS Corr. Tabs .............. 9-8

Figure 56: POSView Message Log ............................................................... 9-9

Figure 57: PCS Front Panel - POS MV V5 ................................................. 9-19

Figure 58: PCS Rear Panel - POS MV V5 .................................................. 9-20

Figure 59: PCS Front Panel – POS MV V5-1 ............................................. 9-20

Figure 60: PCS Rear Panel – POS MV V5-1 .............................................. 9-20

Figure 61: POSView Other Diagnostic ........................................................ 9-26

Figure 62: POSView GNSS Data - Receiver Status Pane ......................... 9-27

Figure 63: POSView Primary GNSS Diagnostics ....................................... 9-28

Figure 64 GAMS Solution Status Window .................................................. 9-28

Figure 65: POSView Input/Output Port Setup............................................. 9-30

Figure 66: POSView NMEA & Binary Output Diagnostic ............................ 9-31

Figure 67: POSView Base 1 Diagnostic ..................................................... 9-32

Figure 68: (1 of 2) Ethernet Communications Failure ................................. 9-33

Figure 69: (2 of 2) Ethernet Communications Failure ................................. 9-34

Figure 70: Example of INS Navigation on a Spherical Earth ....................... B-5

Figure 71: Gimballed INS Platform Structure............................................... B-7

Figure 72: Strap-Down INS Generic Architecture ........................................ B-9

Figure 73: Heave Filter Architecture .......................................................... B-10

Figure 74: Percentage Steady State Error with Heave Bandwidth ............ B-14

Figure 75: Percentage Steady State Error with Damping Ratio ................ B-15

Figure 76: Heave Filter Transient Behaviour with Heave Bandwidth ........ B-16

Figure 77: Heave Filter Transient Behaviour with Damping Ratio ............. B-17

Figure 78: Geographic Antenna Baseline Vector ...................................... B-19

Figure 79: Baseline Comparison ................................................................ B-20

Figure 80: IMU and GNSS Antenna Geometry .......................................... B-22

Figure 81: Carrier Phase Cycle Measurement........................................... B-24

Figure 82: Feasible Position Solutions from One Satellite ......................... B-24

Figure 83: Feasible Position Solutions from Two Satellites ....................... B-25

Figure 84: Feasible Position Solutions from Three Satellites .................... B-25

Figure 85: Horizontal Acceleration Error in a Tilted Platform ..................... B-27

Figure 86: Example of Complementary Navigation Sensor Blending ........ B-31

Figure 87 IMU Types 36, 37 and 42 Mechanical Interface .......................... E-1

Figure 88 IMU Type 26 Mechanical Interface .............................................. E-2

Figure 89 IMU Type 31 and 40 Mechanical Interface .................................. E-3

Figure 90: IMU Type 38 or 39 Mechanical Interface .................................... E-4

Figure 91: IMU Type 21 Mechanical Interface ............................................. E-5

Figure 92: IMU Type 21 Mounting Tray ....................................................... E-6

Figure 93: IMU Type 33 Mechanical Interface ............................................. E-7

Figure 94: Trimble Zephyr II GNSS Antenna Footprint ................................ E-8

Figure 95: Trimble 382AP GNSS Antenna Footprint ................................... E-8

Figure 96: PCS Footprint – POS MV V5-1 ................................................... E-9

Figure 97: PCS Footprint - POS MV V5 ..................................................... E-10

Figure 98: IMU Mounting Plate .................................................................. E-11

Figure 99: Ideal Survey Calibration Area ..................................................... F-2

Figure 100: Correct Roll Calibration ............................................................. F-3

XVI

Figure 101: Incorrect Roll Calibration .......................................................... F-3

Figure 102: IP68 Connector ......................................................................... G-1

Figure 103: GPS. TAI and UTC Time .......................................................... H-2

Figure 104: 1PPS Signal Characteristics ..................................................... H-4

XVII

List of Tables

Table 1: System Performance....................................................................... 1-6

Table 2: Connector/Cable Summary - POS MV V5 .................................... 2-10

Table 3: COM Connectors Pin Assignment - POS MV V5 ......................... 2-11

Table 4: COM Port Configuration ................................................................ 2-12

Table 5: Connector and Port Summary ...................................................... 2-14

Table 6: PWR Connector Pin Assignment .................................................. 2-16

Table 7: COM Connector Pin Assignment .................................................. 2-17

Table 8: COM Connector COM Port Configuration .................................... 2-18

Table 9: I/O Connector Pin Assignment ...................................................... 2-19

Table 10: I/O Connector COM Port Configuration ...................................... 2-20

Table 11: Ethernet Connector Pin Assignment ............................................ 2-21

Table 12: Default COM Port Settings ............................................................ 3-2

Table 13: $xxGGA Sentence Format ............................................................ 3-3

Table 14: $xxGGK Sentence Format ............................................................ 3-5

Table 15: $xxHDT Sentence Format ............................................................ 3-6

Table 16: $xxVTG Sentence Format ............................................................ 3-7

Table 17: $xxGST Sentence Format ............................................................ 3-8

Table 18: NMEA RMC Message Format ...................................................... 3-9

Table 19: RMC Mode Indicator Values ....................................................... 3-10

Table 20: $PASHR Sentence Format ......................................................... 3-11

Table 21: $PRDID Sentence Format .......................................................... 3-12

Table 22: $xxZDA Sentence Format ........................................................... 3-12

Table 23: $UTC Sentence Format .............................................................. 3-13

Table 24: $xxPPS Sentence Format ........................................................... 3-14

Table 25: UTC Sentence Format ................................................................ 3-14

Table 25: TSS1 Output Format ................................................................... 3-17

Table 26: Simrad 1000 Digital Output Format ............................................ 3-18

Table 27: Simrad 3000 Digital Output Format ............................................ 3-19

Table 28: TSM 5265 Digital Output Format ................................................ 3-20

Table 29: Atlas Output Format .................................................................... 3-21

Table 30: PPS Digital Output Format .......................................................... 3-22

Table 31: Time of PPS Digital Output Format............................................. 3-22

XVIII

Table 32: COM 3 and 4 Port Settings ......................................................... 3-23

Table 33: PCS Front Panel Lights ................................................................ 4-2

Table 34: PCS Front Panel Indicators - Fault Identification .......................... 9-4

Table 35: Message Log Entries .................................................................... 9-9

Table 36: Status Warning Messages .......................................................... 9-14

Table 37: Effects of Modifying Heave Filter Parameters ........................... B-13

Table 38: Controlling PC Requirements ...................................................... D-2

Table 39: Message 55 - User Time Recovery ............................................. H-5

Table 40: Common ICD Group Structure ..................................................... H-6

XIX

List of Abbreviations, Synonyms and Symbols

°C Degree Celsius

°F Degree Fahrenheit

μs Microsecond

A Ampere

ac Alternating Current

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange

BNC Bayonet Neil-Concelman (British Naval Connector)

bps Bits Per Second

C/A Coarse Acquisition

CD Compact Disk

cm Centimetre

CTS Clear to Send

dB Decibel

dc Direct Current

DCM Direction Cosine Matrix

deg Degree (plane angle)

DGNSS Differential Global Navigation Satellite System

dia Diameter

DOP Dilution of Position

EMI Electromagnetic Interference

ESD Electrostatic Discharge

FDIR Fault Detection, Isolation and Reconfiguration

ft Foot

g Gravity (acceleration due to gravity)

GAMS GNSS Azimuth Measurement Subsystem

GB Gigabyte

GMT Greenwich Mean Time

GND Ground

gnd Ground

GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System

GUI Graphical User Interface

HDOP Horizontal Dilution Of Precision

hex Hexadecimal

hr Hour

Hz Hertz

I/O Input/Output

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IMU Inertial Measurement Unit

in Inch

INS Inertial Navigation System

I/P Input

IP Ingress Protection

IP Internet Protocol

kb Kilobit

kB Kilobyte

kbps Kilobits Per Second

kHz Kilohertz

LAN Local Area Network

lb Pound (weight)

LWH Length, Width, Height

m Metre

mA Milliampere

Mb Megabit

MB Megabyte

MHz Megahertz

mm Millimetre

mPOS Mini-Position and Orientation System

N/A Not Applicable

N/C No Connection

NED North, East and Down

NMEA National Marine Electronics Association

XXI

NRG No Range Given

NVM Non-Volatile Memory

O/P Output

OTF On-the-Fly

PC Personal Computer

PCS POS Computer system

PDOP Positional Dilution of Precision

POS Position and Orientation system

POS MV Position and Orientation System for Marine Vessels

POSPac Position and Orientation Post Processing Package

PPS Pulse Per Second

pwr Power

QC Quality Control

qty Quantity

RAM Random Access Memory

RD Receive Data

RFI Radio Frequency Interference

RH Relative Humidity

RMS Root Mean Square

RTCM Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services

RTK Real-Time Kinematic

RTS Ready to Sent

RX Receive Data

s Second (time interval)

SAE Society of Automotive Engineers

SI System of Units

SNR Signal-To-Noise Ratio

SV Space Vehicle

sync Synchronous

TCP Transmission Control Protocol

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

TNC Threaded-Neill-Concelman (Threaded Navy Connector)

XXII

TOV Time of Validity

TR Terminal Ready

TTL Transistor-Transistor Logic

UDP Universal Datagram Protocol

UNC Unified National Coarse (Screw Thread)

UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply

UTC Universal Time Coordinated (or Coordinated Universal Time)

TX Transmit Data

Vac Volt Alternating Current

Vdc Volt Direct Current

VDOP Vertical Dilution of Precision

W Watt

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Introduction

1-1

1.0 Introduction

The Applanix POS MV is a Position and Orientation System for Marine Vessels using a system that

provides accurate navigation and attitude data for use by equipment on board the vessel, such as

multibeam sonar, to correct for the effects of vessel motion during survey operations.

This manual contains full installation and operating instructions for the V5 generation of POS MV and is

an important part of the system. The manual should remain easily available for use by those who will

install, operate and maintain the system.

Installation and operation of POS MV are not complex tasks. However, you should spend time to

familiarize yourself with the contents of this manual before you start to install or use the system.

Provided you follow the installation, operation and maintenance instructions included throughout this

manual, POS MV will operate reliably and supply measurements to its specified accuracy.

Unless otherwise stated, the units used throughout this manual conform to the SI International system of

units.

Operators who intend to write their own Ethernet software or data extraction software should contact

Applanix for additional information on the POS MV V5 Ethernet interface. Refer to Technical Support and

Service on page A-1 for contact procedures.

System Description and Overview

Each POS MV system consists of a POS Computer System (PCS) with two embedded Global Navigation

Satellite System (GNSS) receivers, two GNSS antennas and an Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU).

The PCS has two versions:

POS MV V5 - a 19-inch rack mount chassis, 1U high, ac powered.

POS MV V5-1 - a stand alone micro-POS (µPOS) chassis, dc powered.

The POS MV product family consists of four models:

POS MV 320 - consists of a POS MV V5 PCS and a type 35, type 37, type 26 or type 40 IMU.

POS MV WaveMaster - consists of a POS MV V5-1 PCS and a type 36 or type 38 IMU.

POS MV WaveMaster RM - consists of a POS MV V5 PCS and a type 36 or type 38 IMU.

POS MV Elite – consists of a POS MV V5 PCS and a type 33 IMU

Shown in Figure 1 and detailed in Appendix E are the typical components of a POS MV system.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Introduction

1-2

Figure 1: Typical POS MV Components

The POS MV delivers an accurate and comprehensive data set, including:

• Geographic position (latitude, longitude and altitude)

• Heading

• Attitude (roll and pitch)

• Vertical displacement (heave)

• Velocity

• Acceleration

• Angular rate of turn

• Performance metrics

• Fault detection and reporting

POS MV combines the IMU and GNSS sensor data into an integrated navigation solution. There are two

navigation algorithm designs incorporated into the system, namely tightly coupled and loosely coupled

inertial/GNSS integration. Tightly coupled inertial/GNSS integration involves the processing of GNSS

pseudorange, phase and Doppler observables. In this case, the GNSS receiver is strictly a sensor of the

GNSS observables and the navigation functions in the GNSS receiver are not used. With loosely coupled

inertial/GNSS integration, the GNSS position and velocity solution are processed to aid the inertial

navigator.

POS MV employs tightly coupled integration to enhance performance, especially rapid Real-Time

Kinematic (RTK) recovery after a loss of GNSS signal reception. Depending on the availability and

relative quality of sensor inputs such as the primary GNSS, auxiliary GNSS and base station GNSS

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Introduction

1-3

corrections, POS MV will automatically switch between tightly coupled and loosely coupled algorithms to

ensure maximum performance.

With its use of leading-edge technology, POS MV marks a significant breakthrough in the field of aided

inertial navigation and precision motion measurement for use in marine applications. The accuracy and

stability of measurements delivered by the system remain unaffected by vessel turns, changes of speed,

wave-induced motion, or other dynamic manoeuvres.

Therefore, by using POS MV, you can continue survey operations during poor weather and throughout

deteriorating sea conditions. This allows a more efficient use of survey time and a reduction in the overall

cost of the operation.

POS MV generates attitude data in three axis. Measurements of roll, pitch and heading are all accurate to

±0.02° (±0.03° for WaveMaster) or better, regardless of the vessel latitude. Heave measurements

supplied by POS MV maintain an accuracy of 5% of the measured vertical displacement or ±5 cm

(whichever is the larger) for movements that have a period of up to 20 seconds.

The system includes a compact disk containing the MV-POSView Controller program, which runs on a PC

under Microsoft Windows®. After you install the POS MV, you can use this program to configure the

system and monitor its status during operation.

After you have configured the POS MV successfully, you can operate the system in two start-up modes:

• You can use the controller program to enable navigation mode and to monitor the status and

performance of the system, or

• You can operate the POS MV in stand-alone mode. In this mode, after power-on, the system will

enable navigation mode and deliver measurements automatically through whichever ports you

have selected.

Communication between POS MV and the controller program is through a 10/100/1000BaseT Ethernet

link:

• Data output by POS MV may use the Universal Datagram Protocol (UDP) so that other

computers attached to the same Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN) can receive the data or

Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) so that only a single computer can receive the data.

• The controller program uses Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) to issue commands to POS

MV. This blocks other computers on the LAN from receiving the controlling messages, and

prevents POS MV from responding to any other source of controlling message.

Fault Detection, Isolation and Reconfiguration (FDIR) enhances the operating reliability of POS MV. This

feature allows the system to monitor the health of its various sensors so that it can reconfigure itself to

isolate any that show degraded performance. POS MV also estimates and corrects sensor errors on an

ongoing basis using a Kalman Filter that allows it to produce consistent and accurate results.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Introduction

1-4

Operating Modes

POS MV has two operating modes:

Standby Mode:

Following power-on, the IMU, GNSS receivers and the

processor perform self-test sequences after which POS

MV enters standby mode. Typically, this process takes 30

to 40 seconds to complete.

The system will remain in standby mode until you

command a change to another mode, or unless you have

enabled ‘AutoStart’. With AutoStart enabled, the system

will transition automatically into navigate mode.

Applanix ships the POS MV with AutoStart enabled.

Navigate Mode:

Navigate Mode is the normal operating mode of POS MV.

Once you have selected this mode, the system will go

through several stages of navigate mode until it reaches

the final stage, which indicates that POS MV has reached

its full user-defined operating accuracy.

Subsystems

POS MV includes three subsystems: the PCS, IMU and two GNSS receiver cards. The following

paragraphs describe each subsystem individually and Figure 1, page 1-2, shows these major

components.

POS Computer System

The POS Computer System (PCS) comprises the processor, GNSS receivers and interface cards

necessary to communicate with and process the IMU and GNSS data.

Inertial Measurement Unit

The IMU comprises three solid-state linear accelerometers and three solid-state gyros arranged in a

triaxial orthogonal array. These sensitive components, together with the electronics to convert their

analog outputs into the digital information required by the PCS, are all contained in a sealed unit that

requires no maintenance.

IMPORTANT

Do not open the IMU housing for any reason. Opening the IMU

housing will void the warranty.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Introduction

1-5

While the array of linear accelerometers sense acceleration in all three directions, the array of gyros

sense angular motion around all three axis centred on the IMU. The PCS receives these measurements

from the IMU and uses them to compute the measurements of motion. Refer to the Theory of Operation

description starting on page B-1 for a more detailed explanation of the POS MV operating theory.

GNSS Receivers

POS MV includes two GNSS receiver cards:

• A primary receiver card that provides the position, velocity and raw observation information to the

POS MV. It also provides a one Pulse Per Second (PPS) strobe together with a time message

that the POS MV uses to accurately time-stamp data output with Universal Time Coordinated

(UTC) or GPS Time.

• A secondary receiver card, in conjunction with the primary receiver card, which allows the POS

MV to compute GNSS heading aiding by performing carrier phase differential measurements

between the two GNSS receivers.

The system includes two identical antennas with 15 metre (~50 feet) long cables. You must connect each

receiver to a GNSS antenna to receive GNSS signals from the orbiting constellation of satellites.

The antennas supplied with the system have excellent phase centre stability. If you use alternative

antennas with the POS MV, Applanix cannot guarantee the heading or position performance of the

system.

GNSS Azimuth Measurement Subsystem

GNSS Azimuth Measurement Subsystem (GAMS) is a unique feature of POS MV that allows the system

to achieve exceptional accuracy in the measurement of heading. The GAMS subsystem uses two GNSS

receivers and antennas to determine a GNSS-based heading that is accurate to ±0.02° (±0.03° for

WaveMaster) or better (using a two-metre [~6 ½ feet] antenna baseline) when blended with the inertial

navigation solution. POS MV uses this heading information as aiding data together with the position,

velocity and raw observations information supplied by the primary GNSS receiver.

GAMS provides heading aiding to the POS MV. To understand the effect that GAMS has on the system it

is useful to compare system performance with and without GAMS, see Table 1.

Note: Operation without GAMS will occur when POS MV has insufficient data to compute a heading

solution.

Before POS MV can deliver valid measurements for use in your application, you must configure the

system with the relative mounting angles between the IMU and vessel reference frame. You do this by

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Introduction

1-6

selecting a convenient and fixed reference point on the vessel, and by defining a reference frame

orientation centred on that point.

Table 1: System Performance

Parameter

Without GAMS

With GAMS

Heading

accuracy:

0.2° to 2.0° RMS after POS

MV achieves full alignment

(depending on the nature of

vessel manoeuvres).

Heading accuracy degrades

at latitudes above 50°.

0.02° (0.03° for the

WaveMaster), or better,

independent of vessel

manoeuvres and latitude.

POS MV tolerates GAMS

outages lasting several tens

of minutes with no significant

degradation of heading

accuracy.

Alignment

time:

Heading alignment can take

as long as 30 minutes.

Alignment occurs within two

to five minutes.

Vessel

manoeuvres:

More frequent vessel

manoeuvres will improve the

accuracy of heading

measurements. To obtain a

faster alignment and better

accuracy the vessel must

perform a calibration

manoeuvre at intervals of ten

minutes or less.

Accuracy is independent of

vessel manoeuvres.

Follow the instructions in the Installation Parameters description on page 2-24 to measure the mounting

angles of the IMU, vessel and multibeam transducer relative to the reference frame that you have

defined. Refer to the POS MV Configuration description on page 4-7 for instructions to configure POS MV

with these important parameters.

When correctly configured with this information, POS MV delivers measurements for use by the

multibeam transducer, compensated for any difference in mounting angles between the transducer, the

IMU, the vessel and your chosen reference frame.

Operation without GAMS

Figure 2 and the following paragraphs describe how POS MV computes heading without GAMS.

After power-on, and the initialization and self-test routines have finished, the IMU performs a levelling

routine to establish a locally level reference frame. This occurs rapidly and usually finishes within 30

seconds.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Introduction

1-7

POS MV without

GAMS heading aiding

Up to 30 minutes

to complete

POS MV power-on

Rotation IMU wrt reference

frame mounting

angles

IMU begins levelling

and heading

alignment

Heading

information

Rotation

Ship frame wrt

reference frame

mounting angles

Sensor 1 (Sonar) wrt

reference frame

mounting angles

Vessel heading

accuracy = 0.2 to 2

degrees

Sonar heading

accuracy = 0.2 to 2

degrees

Figure 2: Heading Measurement without GAMS

Following its levelling routine, the IMU begins to align itself to true north. This process, called

gyrocompassing, occurs much more slowly and can take from 5 to 30 minutes to complete. The time

taken to complete this process will depend on the latitude and on the manoeuvres that the vessel

performs during the operation.

A more accurate and rapid alignment will occur if the vessel performs a number of calibration manoeuvres

during the alignment process. These manoeuvres consist of full turns, starts and stops, S-curves and

figure-of-eight turns.

After alignment, the IMU delivers measurements of its heading with respect to true north. These are

accurate to between 0.2° and 2.0°, depending on the manoeuvres made by the vessel and its latitude.

Manoeuvres that are more frequent will yield a more accurate heading result, while operation in higher

latitudes will degrade the unaided heading accuracy.

POS MV rotates the IMU heading measurement, using the relative mounting angles between the IMU, the

vessel, the transducer and your chosen reference frame, and delivers heading measurements valid for

the multibeam transducer and the vessel.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Introduction

1-8

Operation with GAMS

Figure 3 and the following paragraphs describe how POS MV computes heading with GAMS heading

aiding.

After power-on, and the Initialization and self-test routines have finished, the IMU performs a levelling

routine to establish a locally level reference frame. This occurs rapidly and usually finishes within 30

seconds.

Following its levelling routine, the IMU begins to align itself to true north. This gyrocompassing process is

aided by the heading input from GAMS and is completed within two to five minutes, depending on how

long it takes GAMS to come online.

GAMS heading error is largely due to GNSS receiver noise and multipath errors. By blending this

information with the IMU data in the Kalman Filter, POS MV can average the GAMS heading error down

to a blended heading accuracy of typically 0.02° RMS (0.03° for WaveMaster) or better.

The Kalman Filter uses information in the IMU coordinate frame. POS MV must therefore rotate GNSS

heading information into this frame.

After alignment, the IMU delivers measurements of vessel heading relative to true north. These possess

an accuracy of ±0.02° RMS (±0.03° for WaveMaster) or better, independent of vessel manoeuvres or

latitude.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Introduction

1-9

GPS derived heading

information

Rotation Surveyed antenna

baseline vector

POS MV with GAMS

heading aiding

IMU begins levelling

and alignment

Rotation IMU wrt reference

frame mounting

angles

Levelling

& alignment data

POS MV power-on After levelling

& alignment

Kalman

Filter

GAMS

Heading aiding information in

IMU coordinate frame

Heading alignment

complete within

2 to 5 minutes

Heading

information

Rotation

Ship frame wrt

reference frame

mounting angles

Sensor 1 (Sonar) wrt

reference frame

mounting angles

Vessel heading

accuracy = 0.02

degree

(0.03° for

WaveMaster) Sonar heading

accuracy = 0.02

degree

(0.03° for

WaveMaster)

Figure 3: Heading Measurement with GAMS

After alignment, the IMU delivers measurements of multibeam transducer heading relative to true north.

These measurements possess the same accuracy as those of vessel heading defined in the paragraph

above.

Refer to the Theory of Operation description on page B-1 for a more complete description of GAMS,

together with an explanation of GNSS carrier phase differential position measurement, levelling,

gyrocompassing and the Kalman Filter.

Refer to the Lever Arm Distances, page 2-26, and the Antenna Separation, page 2-29, descriptions for

instructions to measure the mounting angles of the IMU, multibeam transducer and ship frames with

respect to your chosen reference frame.

Functions

The Applanix POS MV offers many advanced functions including:

• Motion measurement

• TrueHeave (software option)

• Position and velocity measurement

• AutoRecovery and fault detection, isolation and reconfiguration

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Introduction

1-10

• AutoStart

• Ethernet Data logging

• Event tagging

The following paragraphs describe each of these functions.

Motion Measurement

The principal function of POS MV is to deliver dynamically integrated position and orientation data. It

delivers motion measurements (roll and pitch angle, true heading and real-time heave) for use by external

equipment such as multibeam sonar. The system also estimates and displays the accuracy of its attitude

and heading measurements.

TrueHeave

TrueHeave (different than real-time heave) is based on an advanced two sided filter, making use of both

past and present vertical motion data to compute a significantly improved heave estimate. POS MV has

sufficient computational speed such that a secondary estimate of heave can be accomplished shortly

after the sonar acquisition event.

Delayed time heave output not only removes many of the compromises that must be made in real-time,

but provides near real-time Quality Control (QC) of heave performance. The MV-POSView graphical

interface includes a time series plot of both real-time and TrueHeave estimates, which allows the operator

to react if a divergence between the two heave estimates is observed.

Refer to the TrueHeave Operation description on page 6-1 for a full description of the data formats used

by POS MV to output these parameters.

Position and Velocity Measurement

POS MV supplies parameters such as the position, velocity, speed, acceleration and angular rate of the

vessel. The system also estimates and displays the accuracy of some of these output parameters.

Refer to Interfaces and Data Formats on page 3-1 for description of the data formats used by POS MV to

output these parameters.

AutoRecover and Fault Detection, Isolation and Reconfiguration

Because the IMU is the most important sensing subsystem in POS MV, errors in communication between

the PCS and the IMU can cause significant problems. AutoRecovery is a feature that allows POS MV to

recover from such a communication error.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Introduction

1-11

POS MV is tolerant of data corruption caused by noise or power problems on board the vessel. However,

the MV-POSView Controller program will alert you if either of these problems becomes insurmountable,

so that you can take appropriate corrective action.

Fault Detection, Isolation and Reconfiguration (FDIR) allow POS MV to combine data from the GNSS and

the IMU sensor subsystems to offer the best possible navigation solution for the current data quality.

The system monitors its sensor subsystems and determines which of them, if any, shows a degraded

performance. If it finds any sensor subsystem operating with reduced performance, the system re-

combines the available data to retain the highest possible quality in the navigation solution.

AutoStart

You must first configure the system with the following parameters before it can operate properly when you

transition POS MV to its navigate mode:

• The lever arm distances including those from the IMU, multibeam transducer and the primary

GNSS antenna, to your chosen reference point

• The sensor mounting angles of the IMU and the multibeam transducer relative to your chosen

reference frame

These details are generally fixed at the time of installation. You can save them to non-volatile memory so

that POS MV initializes itself correctly during each power-on sequence. If necessary, you can use the MV-

POSView Controller program at any time to alter and save any of the installation parameters.

You can configure POS MV to enter navigate mode (the normal operating mode) automatically after

power-on. Alternatively, you can configure the system to wait until it receives your command to enter

navigate mode.

The ability to automatically enter navigate mode is called AutoStart. You can use the MV-POSView

Controller program to enable or disable AutoStart.

Refer to the System Configuration section on page 4-1 for instructions to configure the system using the

MV-POSView Controller program. Refer to Software Installation on page D-1 for instructions to install the

MV-POSView Controller program on a Personal Computer (PC).

Removable Media Data Logging

Data logging allows the POS MV to store both raw sensor data and real-time processed navigation data

to a removable USB flash drive for post-processing using the Applanix POSPac MMS software; post-

processing enhances navigation solution accuracy. The USB flash drive is transferable between the PCS

and any Microsoft Windows® based computer with a USB port.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Introduction

1-12

Back-up Data Logging

When the removable media logging is active, the same data are written to an internal storage device

within the PCS. In the event that removable media logging fails or the USB flash drive gets lost or

corrupted, anonymous File Transfer Protocol (FTP) may be used to recover the mission data from the

PCS.

Ethernet Data Logging

You can log processed navigation or raw sensor data through the Ethernet to a controlling PC. Data

gathered by the POS MV during a mission may be post-processed using POSPac to further enhance the

quality of seafloor maps generated by multibeam sonar systems. Contact Applanix for more information

on POSPac.

Ethernet Real-Time Output

High rate data are available from the PCS data port using Universal Datagram Protocol (UDP)

broadcasts. The emphasis here is outputting timely data, even though there may be some data loss.

Event Tagging

POS MV provides the facility to ‘time tag’ events using either UTC or GPS Time.

Note: UTC and GPS Times are not identical. Due to the occasional need for a ‘leap second’ to be applied

to UTC, there is an integer number of seconds time difference between UTC and GPS Time. Transitions

between seconds are precisely coincident for both UTC and GPS Time.

Time tagging of events occurs through the EVENT port on the PCS rear panel. To tag an event using

UTC or GPS Time you must provide POS MV with a digital pulse in the range of 3 to 50 V. You can

configure POS MV for a positive edge trigger or a negative edge trigger with respect to the ground

associated with that event input.

Event time tagging occurs when POS MV detects a TTL pulse on the Event 1 or Event 2 line, it captures

the exact time that corresponds to the trigger edge (within a window 1 μs wide). Event records are

available for output on the Ethernet data ports. Contact Applanix for advice if you need additional

information about the Ethernet group structure.

Output Summary

There are several types of communication interfaces that POS MV can use to supply its data. You must

select whichever type will be most suitable for the specific multibeam sonar in use.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Introduction

1-13

In some cases, a multibeam sonar and / or related acquisition system can accept data in more than one

format. However, for specific installations, one type of communications interface usually provides for a

more accurate data exchange than the other.

Electrical noise or sonar timing can have a significant effect on the images produced by the multibeam

sonar. You must consider this when you select the communications interface used to supply position,

attitude and motion data from POS MV. Because each installation will be different, this manual cannot

include explicit instructions in this area.

POS MV can use a variety of interface protocols to output information:

• RS-232

• RS-422

• Ethernet

Each interface protocol is unique. Refer to the Interfaces and Data Formats description starting on page

3-1 for information on each of these interface protocols.

MV-POSView Controller Software

You can use the MV-POSView Controller program to configure POS MV; the controller ships with the

POS MV system. For subsequent operation of the POS MV you can use the controller program or you

can configure the system to start operating automatically with no further need for operator control. A brief

description of the AutoStart feature is located on page 1-11.

Refer to the Software Installation description on page D-1 for instructions to install the MV-POSView

Controller program on your PC. Refer to the System Configuration description on page 4-1 and the

System Operation description on page 5-1 for instructions on how to use the controller program.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-1

2.0 Installation

Installation of the Position and Orientation system for Marine Vessels (POS MV) is reasonably simple,

provided the installation instructions in this manual are carefully followed. Installation and connection of

the POS Computer System (PCS), the Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU) and the Global Navigation

Satellite System (GNSS) antennas should only take a few hours.

This section of the POS MV V5 manual explains each stage of the installation. By following these

instructions, you can unpack, install and configure the system so that it is ready to operate with minimal

delay.

Handling Precautions

To prevent damage to the system components handle all POS MV assemblies with care. The following

paragraphs explain the special handling precautions that apply to the IMU, PCS and GNSS antennas.

Inertial Measurement Unit

The IMU contains sensitive and expensive solid-state

accelerometer and gyro components. Permanent damage to

these components will result if handled roughly.

Exercise care when handling this unit; in particular, be careful when placing the IMU on or mounting it to

any surface. Field repair of the IMU is not possible. If this unit develops a fault or becomes damaged it

must be returned to Applanix for repair. Refer to Technical Support and Service on page A-1 for

procedures.

POS Computer System

Field repair of the PCS is not recommended. If this unit develops a fault or becomes damaged it must be

returned to Applanix for repair. Refer to Technical Support and Service on page A-1 for procedures.

Consider the following when handling the PCS:

• Handle with care.

• Do not drop from any height

• Observe standard Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) procedures.

• Refer to Circular Connectors for a guide on handling the connectors.

GNSS Antennas

Applanix supplies the POS MV with two identical GNSS antennas - handle these with care. Avoid

scratching or damaging the antenna housings in any way.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-2

Any damage to the housings could impair the ability of the antenna to receive satellite signals and

therefore degrade the performance of the associated GNSS receiver.

Unpacking and Storage

The supplied POS MV components and cables are listed on the packing list shipped with the system.

Physically verify that each item is present.

Applanix tests the POS MV system electrically and mechanically prior to delivery. The protective transit

case prevents damage during shipment and ensures the operating integrity of the system.

Important

Retain the original POS MV equipment packing case. Transport or

return POS MV equipment in the original packing case. Improper or

inadequate POS MV equipment packing for storage or transport will

void the warranty.

Upon receipt of the system, check all items carefully against the shipping documents and inspect them for

any damage that may have occurred during transit. If any damage has occurred, file a claim with the

carrier and notify Applanix immediately. Refer to Technical Support and Service on page A-1 for postal

address, contact telephone and fax numbers, and e-mail and Web address for Applanix.

Storage

When storing the POS MV system for an extended period, ensure the following conditions are

maintained:

• Protect the PCS from moisture, excessive humidity and temperature extremes (see Specifications

starting on page 7-1 for details).

• Protect the PCS and IMU from accidental damage by storing in their original shipping cases.

• Store all remaining components in their original shipping cases.

Site Preparation

You can install the system more efficiently if you give early and careful consideration to the location and

layout of the POS MV components.

You should read and understand the instructions in the Installation and Installation Parameters topics on

pages 2-4 and 5-23 before you commence to install the POS MV. By taking this precaution, you will

become more familiar with the requirements of the system and will be less likely to encounter unexpected

problems during this important operation.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-3

Note: Before installing the POS MV, make certain that adequate mounting provisions exist for all

components of the system.

Power Requirements

Applanix strongly recommends that you arrange to supply electrical power to the POS MV from an

Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS). This is for two reasons:

• Usually, the electrical supply on board the vessel will be noisy. Although the POS MV includes

power supply conditioning circuitry, it is a sensible precaution to make certain the power supply is

‘clean’ before it enters the system.

• The electrical supply on board the vessel may be unreliable and may drop out or fall to an

unacceptable level unexpectedly.

A suitable UPS will ‘clean’ the electrical supply before it enters the PCS and will continue to supply power

for a short period if the electrical supply fails for any reason. The UPS should be able to supply the total

power requirements of POS MV.

PCS

POS MV V5

POS MV V5-1

Max.Current:

1.1 A Max

5.5 A Max

Voltage range:

90 Vac to 264 Vac

10 Vdc to 34 Vdc

GNSS Antennas

Both Models

Voltage:

Supplied by the GNSS receiver via the

antenna coaxial cable

IMU

Both Models

Voltage:

Supplied by the PCS via the IMU cable.

Note that for POS MV V5-1 the minimum

usable PCS input voltage depends on a

combination of IMU type and IMU cable

length. Contact customer support for

assistance.

Environmental Requirements

GNSS Antennas

To receive GNSS satellite signals without interruption, the GNSS antennas require a clear view of the sky

from horizon to horizon in all directions. You must mount them outside in an elevated position on the

vessel. Follow the instructions in the GNSS System paragraphs on page 2-4 to install the GNSS

antennas.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-4

Although the antennas are tolerant of an exposed mounting position, please observe the environmental

limits starting on page 7-4 when installing these components.

Inertial Measurement Unit

The IMU has anodized aluminium housing. If you intend to mount the IMU against a steel hull, use

stainless steel spacers of 5 mm (3/16 in) thickness between the IMU and the hull to prevent galvanic

corrosion of the housing. Applanix recommends the use of an IMU mounting plate to aid in aligning the

IMU with the vessel reference frame in which lever arms and misalignments are measured. Refer to

Applanix for details.

Follow the installation instructions listed on page 2-7, Inertial Measurement Unit, to select a suitable

mounting location for the IMU. Observe the environmental limits starting on page 7-4 when selecting a

mounting location for the IMU. Although the IMU is sealed in a housing it is not depth-rated; do not mount

the IMU where it can become immersed in water. An IP68 rated (submersible) option is available, details

of which are available from Applanix Customer Support (see page Appendix A for contact details).

POS Computer System

Applanix ships the PCS in a protective transit case that must be removed prior to operation. Please retain

this packing case for reuse should the system need to be shipped for any reason. Follow the instructions

in the installation paragraphs, starting on page 2-9 for V5 and page 2-12 for V5-1, to install the PCS.

Observe the environmental limits starting on page 7-4 when installing the PCS.

Installation

Important:

1. Equipment shall be installed by qualified personnel.

2. The PCS (POS MV V5 and POS MV V5-1) shall be grounded via the safety ground screw or stud.

3. Power to the POS system should be protected by a user-supplied, resettable circuit breaker.

4. Upstream breaker used to protect POS system shall be limited to 20Amp rating

5. Antenna connection shall be provided only after making the permanent safety earth connection.

GNSS System

Do not connect any input to the PPS (POS MV V5) or PPS OUT

(POS MV V5-1) port. Connecting a signal input to this port will

damage the PCS interface circuitry.

The PCS includes a dual antenna GNSS receiver for operation with the POS MV.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-5

Multipath reflections of the received GNSS signals are the dominant source of measurement errors in the

heading aiding information computed by the GNSS Azimuth Measurement Subsystem (GAMS).

Reflectors can include flat surfaces on the vessel and the surface of the sea.

The POS MV GNSS antennas may be installed anywhere on the vessel, provided their locations meet the

following criteria:

• Observe the environmental limitations specified on page 2-3, GNSS Antennas.

• Avoid GNSS antenna locations that may experience multipath satellite signals caused by

reflections off nearby structures.

• Avoid mounting the GNSS antennas where salt deposits can accumulate and degrade the

received signal quality. Remove salt deposits by washing the antenna with fresh water.

• Do not mount the GNSS antennas closer than 0.5 m (~20 in) to any radar, UHF, satellite

communications or other communications antennas or transmitters.

• Avoid mounting the GNSS antennas in areas that may experience high levels of vibration, shock

or electrical noise.

• Both antennas must have the clearest possible view of the sky from horizon to horizon in all

directions. This means mounting them outside and as high as possible on the vessel.

• Mount the GNSS antennas rigidly with respect to each other and with respect to the IMU within

the vessel. This requirement may be difficult to achieve if the antennas are mounted on separate

masts or on a single mast that can flex with respect to the vessel. Relative movement of one

antenna with respect to the other of more than 0.5 cm (~¼ in), or of both antennas with respect to

the vessel, will introduce an extra source of heading error to degrade the POS MV heading

accuracy.

• Do not mount the antennas near any large flat surface. Large flat surfaces are a source of

multipath reflections that may degrade the accuracy of POS MV heading measurements.

• The system includes two GNSS antennas. Install these so that they have less than 5 m (~16 ½ ft)

separation distance between them. The antenna separation distance must be more than 1 m

(~3 ¼ ft) in the horizontal vector, but it is recommended that the antennas be at least 2 m

(~6 ½ ft) apart.

• Mount both antennas so that the labels on their top surfaces point in approximately the same

direction. This precaution means that both antennas have the same orientation relative to the

vessel.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-6

The phase centres of the GNSS antennas may move by several millimetres as the vessel turns or as

satellites move across the sky. When both antennas have the same orientation, their phase centres will

move approximately together. This will allow a better heading resolution by GAMS.

Install GNSS Antennas

The following instructions refer to the GNSS antennas as the primary and

the secondary units, although both antennas are physically and electrically

identical. Identify, label and connect the antennas in the following manner:

• Primary antenna to ANT1 port on the PCS

• Secondary antenna to ANT2 port on the PCS

Note: POS MV includes two low-loss antenna cables with connectors at each end. These cables are

standard length of 15 m (~50 ft). Applanix can supply longer GNSS antenna cables on request, up to a

maximum allowable length of 50 m (~165 ft) with a maximum signal loss of eight Decibels (dB). It is not

necessary for both cables to be the same length.

1. Install the primary and secondary antennas at the positions you have chosen and prepared.

Note: Orient the label on the top surface of the secondary antenna so that it points in

approximately the same direction as the label on the primary antenna.

2. Connect the TNC cable connector to the GNSS antenna and tighten the connection. Use

waterproof tape and a suitable silicone sealant to protect the connection against the ingress of

water or dirt.

3. Route the antenna cable from the primary antenna to the PCS mounting location. Avoid

subjecting the cable to sharp bends or other mechanical stresses; minimum bend radius of LMR

400 cable is one inch (~ 25 mm). Use cable clips to secure the cable at regular intervals along its

length. At the PCS mounting location, identify the cable clearly as the primary antenna.

4. Connect the primary antenna cable to the ANT1 port on the PCS rear panel.

5. Route the antenna cable from the secondary antenna to the PCS mounting location. Avoid

subjecting the cable to sharp bends or other mechanical stresses. Use cable clips to secure the

cable at regular intervals along its length. At the PCS mounting location, identify the cable clearly

as the secondary antenna.

6. Connect the secondary antenna cable to the ANT2 port on the PCS rear panel.

Note: You must identify the primary and the secondary antennas clearly. POS MV uses the lever

arms distances between your chosen reference point and the primary GNSS antenna to generate

a navigation solution.

Figure 4: GNSS Antenna

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-7

Once the GNSS antennas are installed, measure the antenna separation distance. POS MV can calculate

this distance automatically during the installation calibration routine, although it will mean the routine will

take longer to complete. If you make a manual measurement instead, record the distance between the

antenna phase centres to an accuracy of ±5 mm (±¼ in). The GNSS antenna footprint is shown on page

E-8.

Inertial Measurement Unit

The IMU contains sensitive and expensive solid-state

accelerometer and gyro components. Permanent damage to

these components will result if handled roughly. To prevent

irreversible damage, handle the IMU with care while installing

the system.

Mechanical Interface Information for POS MV IMU options can be found in Appendix E (beginning on

page E-1).

Locate the IMU

The IMU is a self-contained unit that must be connected to the PCS using the supplied shielded cable.

Consider the following guidelines when selecting a location to install the IMU:

• Observe the environmental limitations specified on page 2-4, Inertial Measurement Unit.

• Avoid mounting the IMU where it may experience high levels of vibration, shock or electrical

noise.

• The standard IMU connection cable is 8 m (~26 ft) long. Plan the system layout carefully so that

the cable will fit between the IMU and the PCS. Do not subject the cable to sharp bends or other

mechanical stresses. Applanix can supply a longer cable of up to 50 m (~165 ft) in length if

necessary. Use suitable clips to support the cable at intervals along its length.

• Ensure the mounting location permits easy access to attach the cable to the IMU.

• Mount the IMU with its base plate nominally level.

• Ideally, install the IMU at a location for which you require roll, pitch, heading and heave

measurements. Usually this implies mounting the IMU close to, or even on, the multibeam

transducer. The chosen location must provide rigid support so that the IMU does not move

relative to the GNSS antennas; see GNSS System on page 2-4.

• It is not necessary to install the IMU at the vessel’s centre of rotation. There is no degradation of

POS MV performance if the IMU is mounted away from the vessel’s centre of rotation, although

this offset should be measured and applied during configuration of the system; see the POS MV

Configuration topic starting on page 4-7.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-8

• There is a label on the top plate of the IMU to identify its sensing axis. It is not required to align

these marks closely with the vessel or the multibeam transducer. Instead, measure the mounting

angles, save them in the PCS when you first power-on and configure the system.

• Two offset holes are predrilled in the base to accept 5 mm (0.197 in) diameter alignment pins.

These holes maintain IMU orientation and alignment when the unit is replaced, see Figure 5. Two

colinear slots are machined in the base to mate with corresponding rails on the IMU mounting

plate. These slots maintain IMU alignment on the mounting plate when the unit is replaced but

allow the orientation to be reversed in case of cable interference during installation.

Figure 5: Typical IMU Mounting Features

Install the IMU

Once a suitable mounting location is selected, perform the following steps to install the IMU:

1. Apply a thin film of anti-seize grease from the supplied packet all around the alignment pins or

rails, whichever is used, to prevent the IMU housing from becoming stuck on the mounting plate.

2. Attach the IMU to the mounting location using four M5 ( #10 ) pan head bolts inserted through the

fixing holes in the base plate, isolating the IMU from the hull by way of an electrically non-

conductive material if possible. Use flat and shake proof washers under the IMU mounting

screws. Ensure that the flat washers (not shake proof washers) are placed in direct contact with

the IMU base plate.

3. Tighten the mounting bolts in a uniform manner, exercising care not to over torque. Avoid warping

the IMU base plate.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-9

4. Attach the IMU connection cable to the IMU connector. Route the cable from the IMU to the PCS

mounting location. Avoid subjecting the cable to sharp bends or other mechanical stresses. Use

cable clips to secure the cable at regular intervals along its length.

5. Connect the IMU cable to the IMU port on the rear panel of the PCS.

6. After IMU installation, measure the lever arm distances and the mounting angles that POS MV

requires to generate its navigation solutions. Refer to page 2-24, Installation Parameters for

details of these parameters.

POS Computer System - POS MV V5

The PCS is the heart of the POS MV V5 systems. The PCS footprint is shown in Appendix E .

Install the PCS

Remove the PCS from its transit case to allow connection and operation. With the PCS removed from the

transit case, you can install, connect and use the unit in a 19 inch instrument rack where it occupies one

rack unit of space. Use an instrument rack that provides isolation against shock and vibration.

Observe the following installation constraints:

Do not hang the PCS from the loose panel mounting hardware.

Support the PCS weight from underneath while tightening the

panel mounting hardware.

• Observe the environmental limitations starting on page 7-4.

• Do not install the PCS where it may come into direct contact with water or high concentrations of

dust.

• The PCS may be mounted in a shock isolating 19-inch instrument rack if one is available. The

PCS occupies one rack unit of space in a 19 inch instrument rack.

• Do not mount the PCS to a vibrating surface or one that may experience severe shocks.

• A minimum of 15 cm (~6 in) clearance is required behind the PCS cabinet for cable connection

and ventilation. Do not restrict the airflow intakes located on each side of the cabinet. If

necessary, provide additional fan ventilation inside the instrument rack to prevent overheating.

• Provide sufficient cable lengths to allow easy connection to the ports on the PCS rear panel.

Rear Panel Electrical Connections

The rear panel of the PCS provides connections for power and communications with sensors and other

devices, see Figure 6.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-10

ELECTRICAL HAZARD

The PCS employs double pole / neutral fusing on the power

receptacle. Each of the two RoHS compliant fuses are rated at:

• Rating = 250 V

• Current = 4 A

• Type = fast acting

• Case = 5.2 mm x 20 mm

Figure 6: PCS Rear Panel - POS MV V5

Use Table 2 as a guide when making cable connections to the PCS rear panel.

Table 2: Connector/Cable Summary - POS MV V5

Connector

Cable

Description

PWR, 3-pin

male

Standard 3-

conductor IEC

cable

The internal power supply is auto-switching;

see page 2-3 for details

IMU, 19-pin

female

Shielded

cable

• RS-422 serial data

• Supplies dc power to and receives data

from IMU

LAN, RJ-45

female

Straight

through or

Cross over

cable (meets

Cat5)

• Ethernet interface communicates with a

controlling PC through this 10/100/1000

Base-T port

• Port used to complete initial POS MV

configuration

Note: The POS MV system may be configured in

the ‘AutoStart’ mode, so that subsequent operations

uses a standalone mode without the further need

for an Ethernet connection.

PPS, BNC

female

75 ohm

coaxial cable

(RG59/U)

• A TTL strobe at one pulse per second.

• Output pulse polarity and pulse width is

configurable from POSView controller.

• Leading edge of pulse is coincident with

exact GNSS second.

• Provides synchronization with GPS Time.

Note: Do not connect an input signal to the PPS

OUT port; otherwise, damage to the PCS interface

circuitry may result.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-11

Table 2: Connector/Cable Summary - POS MV V5

Connector

Cable

Description

COM(1),

DE-9P

Single-

shielded cable

RS-232 Serial I/O port (digital)

COM(2),

DE-9P

Single-

shielded cable

RS-232 Serial I/O port (digital)

COM(3),

DE-9P

Single-

shielded cable

RS-232 / RS-422 (software switchable) Serial

I/O port (digital)

COM(4),

DE-9P

Single-

shielded cable

RS-232 / RS-422 (software switchable) Serial

I/O port (digital)

ANT1, TNC

female

50 ohm

coaxial cable

(RG303/U)

Supplies dc power to and receives signals

from primary GNSS antenna

ANT2, TNC

female

50 ohm

coaxial cable

(RG303/U)

supplies dc power to and receives signals

from secondary GNSS antenna

If the POS MV V5 receives power from an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), make certain that it is

operating at the correct voltage; refer to the Power Requirements description on page 2-3 for details.

Good grounding practices are essential for proper operation of the POS MV V5 systems.

COM (1) through COM (4) Interface

PHYSICAL INTERFACE

Serial cables should not exceed 15 m [~49 ft] in length. To ensure data integrity, use high quality RS-232

cable with its shielding connected through the back shell to ground at both cable ends. Table 7, page 2-

17 and Table 9, page 2-19 provide COM port connector assignments and mapping for the POS MV V5-1

PCS. Table 3 provides the same information for the POS MV V5 PCS.

Table 3: COM Connectors Pin Assignment - POS MV V5

Pin Description

Signal Type

Signal

Direction

N/C (port 1 & 2)

N/A

RXa (port 3 & 4)

RS-422

Input

RX (port 1 & 2)

RS-232

Input

RXb (port 3 & 4)

RS-422

Input

TX (port 1 & 2)

RS-232

Output

TXb (port 3 & 4)

RS-422

Output

N/C (port 1 & 2)

N/A

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-12

Table 3: COM Connectors Pin Assignment - POS MV V5

Pin Description

Signal Type

Signal

Direction

TXa (port 3 & 4)

RS-422

Output

GND (port 1 through 4)

N/A

N/C (port 1 through 4)

N/A

RTS (port 1 & 2)

RS-232

Output

N/C (port 3 & 4)

N/A

CTS (port 1 & 2)

RS-232

Input

N/C (port 3 & 4)

N/A

N/C (port 1 through 4)

N/A

POS MV V5 Rear Panel

DE-9P Male Connector

INTERFACE CONFIGURATION

Table 4 identifies the configuration for the COM ports.

Table 4: COM Port Configuration

Setting

Value

Baud Rate

2400 to 115200

Parity

None, Even, Odd

Data Bits

7, 8

Stop Bits

1, 2

Flow Control

Hardware, Software, None

POS Computer System - POS MV V5-1

The PCS is the heart of the POS MV V5 systems. The PCS footprint is shown in Appendix E .

Install the PCS

Remove the PCS from its transit case to allow connection and operation. The MV V5-1 PCS is a sealed

unit and may be installed in almost any location that is convenient.

Observe the following installation constraints:

• Observe the environmental limitations starting on page 7-4.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-13

• The PCS is sealed so the only way for it to shed heat is via conduction, either to the air or another

metal surface. Allow for air circulation around the PCS or remove the rubber feet and bolt the

PCS to another metal surface that can conduct the heat away. If necessary, provide additional

fan ventilation to prevent overheating.

• Do not mount the PCS to a vibrating surface or one that may experience severe shocks.

• A minimum of 15 cm (~6 in) clearance is required behind the PCS for cable connection.

• Provide sufficient cable lengths to allow easy connection to the connectors on the PCS rear panel

or cable stubs supplied with the PCS.

Rear Panel Electrical Connections

The rear panel of the PCS provides connections for power and communications with sensors and other

devices, see Figure 7.

The POS MV V5-1 PCS footprint is shown in Appendix E . There are ten connectors located on the rear

panel of the PCS, see Figure 7. Each rear panel connector supports a single cable except for the I/O and

COM connectors, which support a multi-connector breakout cable. Table 5 provides a summary of the

connectors used in the POS MV configuration.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-14

Figure 7: PCS Rear Panel – POS MV V5-1

Table 5: Connector and Port Summary

Connector

Port

Description

PWR

Connects to a customer source

IMU

• RS-422 serial I/O data port

• Supplies dc power to IMU

COM

COM (1)

RS-232 Serial I/O port (digital) with

Tx/Rx/CTS/RTS

COM (2)

RS-232 Serial I/O port (digital) with

Tx/Rx/CTS/RTS

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-15

Table 5: Connector and Port Summary

Connector

Port

Description

PPS In

• Optically isolated digital input, 3 to 50 Vdc

signal level, 1 mA maximum input current

requirement

• Only effective if external GNSS option is

enabled through POSConfig

I/O 1

COM (3)

• RS-232/422 Serial I/O port (digital) with

Tx/Rx only

• Software control of 232 / 422 switch

• Software switch to connect with Primary

GNSS receiver COM 1 for software

upgrade - contact Applanix Customer

Support for details

DIO - Event 1

• Optically isolated digital input, 3 to 50 Vdc

signal level, 1 mA maximum input current

requirement

• Event 1 time tagging

DIO - Event 2

• Optically isolated digital input, 3 to 50 Vdc

signal level, 1 mA maximum input current

requirement

• Event 2 time tagging

PPS Out

• One pulse per second for synchronization

with GPS time

• TTL signal level

I/O 2

COM (4)

• RS-232/422 Serial I/O port (digital) with

Tx/Rx only

• Software control of 232 / 422 switch

• Software switch to connect with

Secondary GNSS receiver COM 1 for

software upgrade - contact Applanix

Customer Support for details

DIO - Event 3

• Optically isolated digital input, 3 to 50 Vdc

signal level, 1 mA maximum input current

requirement

• Event 3 time tagging

DIO - Event 4

• Optically isolated digital input, 3 to 50 Vdc

signal level, 1 mA maximum input current

requirement

• Event 4 time tagging

PPS Out

• One pulse per second for synchronization

with GPS time

• TTL signal level

DMI

• Not Implemented

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-16

Table 5: Connector and Port Summary

Connector

Port

Description

Ethernet

• 10/100/1000 Base-T

• Communication between POS MV and

MV-POSView

USB

• USB 2.0 Host

ANT1

I/O TNC connector - supplies dc power and

receives signal from primary GNSS antenna

ANT2

I/O TNC connector - supplies dc power and

receives signal from secondary GNSS

antenna

Power Connector

Table 6 and Figure 8 identify the pin assignments for the power connector.

Table 6: PWR Connector Pin Assignment

Pin Description

+10 to +34 V dc input

N/C

Return

POS MV Receptacle:

Lemo HES-1F-303-CLDP

3 pin male (shown)

Cable Plug:

Lemo FGS.1F.303.CLM

Figure 8: PWR Connector Pin Arrangement

IMU Connector

Do not disconnect the IMU cable while the PCS is powered-on.

Damage to the IMU or the PCS hardware may result.

The IMU data/power interface is a multi-pin female circular connector.

A proprietary shielded cable, supplied with the system, connects the IMU to the PCS. Ensure the cable is

secure by locking the connector shell to the base.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-17

COM Connector

There is one COM connector which supports a multi-connector breakout cable (COM cable) that provides

access to two independent, 4 wire RS232 serial communication ports.

Table 7 and Figure 9 provide the pin assignment for the COM connector and pin mapping of the COM

cable.

Table 7: COM Connector Pin Assignment

I/O Pin

Pin Description

I/O Cable Mapping

Signal

Type

Signal

Direction

Connector

COM 1 Rx

DE-9

(Male)

RS232

Input

COM 1 Tx

RS232

Output

COM 1 RTS

RS232

Output

COM 1 CTS

RS232

Input

Signal Ground

Common

COM 2 Rx

DE-9

(Male)

RS232

Input

COM 2 Tx

RS232

Output

COM 2 RTS

RS232

Output

COM 2 CTS

RS232

Input

Signal Ground

Common

PPS In

**see notes

Input

PPS In Return

Return

Input

** PPS In is an optically isolated digital input.

** The input (and return line) is not referenced and is independent of internal µPOS power supplies and

GND.

** PPS input can be triggered from an external 3 – 50 Vdc source capable of supplying a minimum of 1

mA of sourcing or sinking current.

POS MV Receptacle:

Lemo HEN.2F.312.CLNP

12 pin female (shown)

Cable Plug:

Lemo FGN.2F.312.CLC

Figure 9: COM Connector Pin Arrangement

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-18

Physical Interface

To ensure data integrity, use high quality RS-232 cable with its shielding connected through the back

shell to ground at both cable ends.

Interface Configuration

Table 12 identifies the possible configurations for the COM connector COM ports (default in bold).

Table 8: COM Connector COM Port Configuration

Setting

Value

Baud Rate

2400 to 115200 (9600)

Parity

None, Even, Odd

Data Bits

7, 8

Stop Bits

1, 2

Flow Control

Hardware, Software, None

PPS Input

The PCS requires the one Pulse Per Second (PPS) signal for internal timing requirements. This signal is

normally obtained from the primary GNSS receiver but may be from an external GNSS receiver. The PPS

input signal is only effective if the external GNSS option is enabled through the POSConfig menu

selection in MV-POSView (refer to the Manage Multiple Configurations description on page 4-27).

Figure 10 provides a functional diagram.

Figure 10: PPS Port Signal Sources - Functional Diagram

I/O Connector

There are two identical I/O connectors which support a multi-connector breakout cable (I/O cable) that

permits access to the following signals:

• One 2-wire RS232/RS422 multi-function COM port

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-19

• One output for the One Pulse Per Second (PPS) signal

Table 9 and Figure 11 provide the pin assignment for the I/O connector and pin mapping of the I/O cable.

Table 9: I/O Connector Pin Assignment

I/O Pin

Pin Description

I/O Cable Mapping

Signal

Type

Signal

Direction

Connector

COM 3(4) Rx+

DE-9

(Male)

RS422

Input

COM 3(4) Rx

RS232 /

RS422

Input

COM 3(4) Tx

RS232 /

RS422

Output

COM 3(4) Tx+

RS422

Output

Signal Ground

Common

Strobe 1(2) Out

No connection

5V TTL

Output

Strobe 1(2) Out Return

5V TTL

Output

Event 1(3) In

**see notes

Input

Event 1(3) In Return

**see notes

Input

Event 2(4) In

**see notes

Input

Event 2(4) In Return

**see notes

Input

PPS Out

centre

BNC

5V TTL

Output

PPS Return

shell

5V TTL

Output

5, 6, 8,

17, 18,

Reserved

No connection

N/A

** All Event Inputs are optically isolated digital inputs.

** Inputs (and their return lines) are not referenced and are independent of internal µPOS power

supplies and GND.

** Event inputs can be triggered from an external 3 – 50 Vdc source capable of supplying a minimum of

1 mA of sourcing or sinking current.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-20

POS MV Receptacle:

Lemo HEP.2F.319.CLNP

19 pin female (shown)

Cable Plug:

Lemo FGP.2F.319.CLC

Figure 11: I/O Connector Pin Arrangement

COM Port Configuration

Table 10 identifies the possible configurations for the I/O connector COM ports (default in bold).

Table 10: I/O Connector COM Port Configuration

Setting

Value

Interface

RS232, RS422

Baud Rate

2400 to 115200 (9600)

Parity

None

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Flow Control

None

GNSS Access

The serial digital port for each GNSS receiver is accessible for upgrading the receiver through the I/O

COM ports. Access to the GNSS serial port is under software control in the same way that other functions

are assigned to COM ports.

PPS Output

The PCS uses the one Pulse Per Second (PPS) signal from a GNSS receiver for internal timing

requirements. A user customizable version of this signal is provided on the connector to allow external

equipment to be synchronized with POS MV. A dialog in MV-POSView allows control of the polarity and

pulse width of the PPS output signal.

The PPS output port is an active circuit. Ensure that an ‘input

signal’ is NOT connected to the PPS output port, otherwise

damage may result.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-21

The 1PPS signal is a TTL level strobe that occurs at a 1 Hz rate. The leading edge of the strobe is

coincident with the exact GPS second. The corresponding time message that specifies the UTC time of

the 1PPS is available in multiple formats from any COM port by selecting the desired configuration

through MV POSView. Refer to the GNSS Timing Basics description starting on page H-2.

Ethernet Connector

A 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interface provides communication between the PCS and other PCs for

monitoring or controlling the system. The Ethernet port can also be used to transmit POS MV data to a

host PC for real-time processing or for data logging and subsequent post-processing with POSPac MMS.

The Ethernet port supports both Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and Universal

Datagram Protocol (UDP).

Physical Interface

An Ethernet cable is supplied with the POS MV system: a shielded straight through cable. The Ethernet

interface on the PCS is auto detecting so a cross-over cable is not required. The cable is terminated with

shielded RJ-45 connectors. Ensure that replacement cables meet the RJ-45 Cat5 standard, or better (i.e.

Cat6, Cat6e), to avoid an impedance mismatch. In addition, the maximum cable length is determined by

the Ethernet specification. Table 11 provides connector pin assignments and mapping.

Table 11: Ethernet Connector Pin Assignment

Pin Description

Signal

Type

Signal

Direction

BI_DA+

Analog

Bidirectional

BI_DA-

Analog

Bidirectional

BI_DB+

Analog

Bidirectional

BI_DC+

Analog

Bidirectional

BI_DC-

Analog

Bidirectional

BI_DB-

Analog

Bidirectional

BI_DD+

Analog

Bidirectional

BI_DD-

Analog

Bidirectional

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-22

Pin Description

Signal

Type

Signal

Direction

POS MV Rear Panel

RJ-45 Female Connector

Pin out for a 100 BaseT crossover cable

TD+

TD-

RD+

RD-

TD-

TD+

RD+

RD-

The Ethernet interface provides a means for configuring and monitoring the POS MV and conforms to the

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) standard 802.3 that comprise the following types

of ports:

• One control port - TCP/IP transmits configuration information to POS MV and operates in

conjunction with the Display port described below

• One display port - UDP provides data at a 1 Hz rate for use by MV-POSView software

• One real-time data port – user configurable data output, at rates up to 200 Hz - (asynchronous

events at higher rates), broadcast using UDP protocol to minimize latency.

• One logging data port - user configurable data output, at rates up to 200 Hz - (asynchronous

events at higher rates), using TCP/IP protocol to ensure data integrity.

Note: Data output from the display port (above) is broadcast using UDP protocol and may be

captured by any host on the physical Ethernet network (regardless of the IP address of the host).

Note: Network routers typically block UDP protocol data transmissions. In addition, other couplers

can only receive UDP data if they are in the same subnet (i.e. class B or class C). The subnet class

(B or C) is determined by the choice of Ethernet address.

Output Data Format

The data available on the Ethernet connection (for both Display and Data ports) is organized into a group

and message structure. Each port is configured independently in terms of the groups that are output and

only those groups selected for a port are output on that port.

Refer to the Data Logging - Ethernet description on page 5-15 for information on selecting data groups for

output. Please refer to Applanix document PUBS-ICD-004089 (supplied on CD with POS MV or available

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-23

from Applanix Customer support on request) if the data are used with software other than MV-POSView

or POSPac MMS.

Input Data Format

The data input to the POS MV on the control port is organized into a message structure. Refer to

Applanix document PUBS-ICD-004089 (supplied on CD with POS MV or available from Applanix

Customer support on request) if control commands will be generated by software other than MV-

POSView.

USB Connector

A USB A type connector is located on the rear of the PCS. This Host port supports the USB 2.0 standard

and is intended for external sensor connections.

ANT1 and ANT2 Interfaces

Signals from the GNSS antennas are coupled to the GNSS receivers using the ANT1 (primary GNSS)

and ANT2 (secondary GNSS) ports located on the rear panel of the PCS.

The operating dc voltage for each antenna is coupled through the centre conductor of each cable and is

supplied by the PCS; GNSS signals are routed through the same conductor to the respective receiver. If it

is necessary to replace an antenna cable and RG-303 (50 ohm) coaxial cable is not available, RG-400

(50 ohm) may be used as an alternate. Both the GNSS antennas and the PCS ANT1 and ANT2 ports are

female TNC connectors.

Ancillary Equipment Interfaces

Auxiliary GNSS Receiver

Any of the four COM ports may be used for connecting one or two auxiliary GNSS receivers to the PCS.

The output of the auxiliary GNSS receiver must be manually configured before it can be used by POS

MV. The PCS will only use an auxiliary GNSS receiver if its quality is better than the primary GNSS

receiver. The state of the auxiliary GNSS receiver input is displayed in the GNSS Data window, see

Figure 50 on page 8-2.

Obtain a cable and connector to suit the particular requirements of the GNSS receiver in use. Refer to

Table 3 on page 2-11 for the connector pin assignments of the COM ports.

Sonar Hardware and Acquisition Software

Any of the four COM ports may be used for connecting the sonar to the PCS. Note that Applanix strongly

recommend the use of an Ethernet interface in preference to serial for interfacing to sonar acquisition

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-24

systems. Unlike asynchronous serial messages, the Applanix defined Ethernet messaging (see PUBS-

ICD-004089 for details) includes a microsecond accurate time of validity.

Installation Parameters

Once the POS MV components are installed, the installation parameters must be measured. These

measurements allow the POS MV to deliver the best possible performance.

After you have configured the system with these parameters, save the data to non-volatile memory for

immediate use each time the POS MV is powered-on.

The POS MV configuration information defines the layout of the system and its associated peripheral

equipment relative to a reference point. The reference point is defined as any convenient location on the

survey vessel, and it may be assigned any orientation that you choose. Once you have decided on a

reference point, make the following measurements as carefully and accurately as possible.

Lever Arm Distances

Note: Measure distances in metres, resolved into their longitudinal, lateral and vertical components in

the reference frame.

NB POS MV uses a right-hand Cartesian co-ordinate system. Hence the lever arm offsets

should be entered using the following rules:

+X=to Bow, +Y=to Starboard, +Z=Down

NB When using DGPS, lever arms should be measured to 0.05m. When using RTK or

POSPac MMS IAPPK, lever arms should be measured to 0.005m.

• Reference to IMU

• Reference to primary GNSS antenna:

• Reference to vessel

• Reference to sensor 1 and sensor 2

• Reference to auxiliary GNSS antenna:

• Reference to centre of rotation measurement location - measure to an accuracy of ±0.10 m

When measuring the lever arm distances, you must resolve them into their longitudinal, lateral and

vertical components using the reference frame. Refer to the Theory of Operation description on page B-1

for an explanation of the various frames of reference used by POS MV.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-25

Additionally, the scalar antenna separation distance may be measured to an accuracy of 5 mm (~¼ in),

although this is not necessary as this value will be computed by POS MV as part of the GAMS calibration

process.

Record the measurements carefully so that you can use the MV-POSView Controller program to

configure the system. These measurements inform POS MV of the relative positions of the IMU, the

GNSS antenna, the multibeam transducer (sensor 1) and the vessel by relating them all to a common

reference point that you have defined. It may be convenient for you to define the reference point to be

coincident with the IMU for example, in which case the lever arm distances for this relationship will be

zero.

Measurements of position, attitude, velocity and dynamics displayed by the main window of the MV-

POSView Controller program (

Figure 35, page 5-3) are valid for the vessel location. You define their precise point of validity by

configuring the system with the lever arm distances between the reference point and your chosen vessel

location.

Mounting Angles

Note: Measure angles in degrees, resolved into the longitudinal, lateral and vertical axis in the reference

frame:

• IMU with respect to the reference frame

• Sensor with respect to the reference frame

When measuring the mounting angles you must resolve them into rotations, in a strict sequence, about

the longitudinal, lateral and vertical axis using the reference frame.

Record the measurements carefully so that you can use the MV-POSView Controller program to

configure the system. These measurements inform POS MV of the relative orientations of the IMU and

the multibeam transducer (sensor 1) by relating them all to a common reference frame that has been

defined. It may be convenient to define the reference frame to be coincident with the multibeam

transducer for example, in which case the mounting angles for this relationship will be zero. Note that, by

definition, the vessel frame and the reference frame co-align.

The accuracy with which you measure the mounting angles will affect the accuracy of measurements

made by the multibeam sonar:

• Measure the mounting angles to the same degree of accuracy that you require of POS MV. For

example, if you require POS MV to deliver roll measurements for multibeam sonar compensation

to an accuracy of 0.02°, then you must measure the mounting angles to an accuracy of 0.02°.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-26

• Not measuring the mounting angles to the required accuracy will cause a constant offset in all the

images from the multibeam sonar. Additionally, some multibeam sonar may calculate the beam

forming parameters incorrectly.

• Perform a ‘patch test’ to determine whether there is any uncorrected misalignment between the

multibeam sonar and the POS MV. Many operators have a defined procedure to complete a

patch test to refine the accuracy of the POS MV and multibeam sonar interface. The Patch Test

topic on page F-1 describes a suitable patch test procedure that can be used.

The following subsections of this manual explain how to measure the lever arm distances and mounting

angles in readiness to configure POS MV.

Note: After you have made all the required physical measurements on the POS MV installation, refer to

the System Configuration description on page 4-1 for instructions on configuring the system and saving

all the information to non-volatile memory.

Lever Arm Distances

Before starting to measure the lever arm distances, you must define a reference starting point. Choose an

easily identifiable point at some convenient location on the vessel that allows you to measure offset

distances in three axes. The reference point must be fixed and rigid relative to the IMU, the GNSS

antennas and the multibeam transducer.

Measure and resolve the lever arm distances using the reference frame:

• X lever arm - the distance measured along the surveyed horizontal fore-aft axis of the vessel (X is

positive towards the bow of the vessel)

• Y lever arm - the distance measured along the surveyed horizontal port-starboard axis of the

vessel (Y is positive towards starboard)

• Z lever arm - the distance measured along the surveyed vertical axis of the vessel (Z is positive

down)

Reference to IMU Lever Arm

Measure and record the distance from your reference point to the centre of the circular black and white

label on top of the IMU.

• A positive value for the X lever arm means the IMU is forward of your reference point

• A positive value for the Y lever arm means the IMU is to starboard of your reference point

• A positive value for the Z lever arm means the IMU is below your reference point

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-27

Reference to Primary GNSS Lever Arm

Measure and record the distance from your reference point to the centre of the primary GNSS antenna.

• A positive value for the X lever arm means the primary GNSS antenna is forward of your

reference point

• A positive value for the Y lever arm means the primary GNSS antenna is to starboard of your

reference point

• A negative value for the Z lever arm means the primary GNSS antenna is above your reference

point

Reference to Vessel Lever Arm

POS MV uses the main window of the controller program to display its navigation solution, valid for the

point you have defined as the vessel datum. Measure and record the distance from your reference point

to the vessel datum.

• A positive value for the X lever arm means the vessel datum is forward of your reference point

• A positive value for the Y lever arm means the vessel datum is to starboard of your reference

point

• A positive value for the Z lever arm means the vessel datum is below your reference point

Reference to Sensor 1 Lever Arm

Sensor 1 is typically a multibeam transducer. Measure and record the distance from your reference point

to the sensing centre of the multibeam transducer array.

• A positive value for the X lever arm means the multibeam transducer is forward of your reference

point

• A positive value for the Y lever arm means the multibeam transducer is to starboard of your

reference point

• A positive value for the Z lever arm means the multibeam transducer is below your reference

point

Reference to Sensor 2 Lever Arm

Measure and record the distance from your reference point to the second sensor.

• A positive value for the X lever arm means the second sensor is forward of your reference point

• A positive value for the Y lever arm means the second sensor is to starboard of your reference

point

• A positive value for the Z lever arm means the second sensor is below your reference point

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-28

Note: If your application does not use a second sensor, record these lever arm distances as zero.

Reference to Auxiliary GNSS Lever Arm

The auxiliary GNSS supplies DGNSS, P-Code or RTK measurements to POS MV. Measure and record

the distance from your reference point to the auxiliary GNSS antenna.

• A positive value for the X lever arm means the auxiliary GNSS antenna is forward of your

reference point

• A positive value for the Y lever arm means the auxiliary GNSS antenna is to starboard of your

reference point

• A negative value for the Z lever arm means the auxiliary GNSS antenna is above your reference

point

Note: If your application does not include an auxiliary GNSS receiver, record these lever arm distances

as zero.

Reference to Centre of Rotation

Normal dynamics in a marine environment apply a complex combination of forces to a survey vessel,

causing the vessel to experience a continuously varying pattern of heave, roll and pitch.

Under the influence of these, vertical movements experienced by the multibeam transducer include two

components:

• Heave movements as the vessel moves vertically in the water - in the absence of any changes in

vessel attitude, these will be the same throughout the vessel.

• Apparent heave movements under the influence of roll and pitch - the amplitude of these will vary

directly with distance from the vessel centre of rotation.

The vessel centre of rotation is a point of the vessel that experiences only rotations with changes in

attitude. Any heave measured at this point arises entirely from vertical movements that affect the whole

vessel equally.

The multibeam transducer will be some distance from the vessel centre of rotation. The transducer will

therefore experience a small component of heave as the vessel moves vertically in the water and a much

larger component of apparent heave with changes in vessel attitude.

To separate these effects, POS MV translates the IMU measurements to the vessel centre of rotation.

Having done so, it applies filtering to the measurements of pure heave as explained in the Theory of

Operation on page B-1 and then translates the filtered measurements back to the positions of sensors 1

and 2.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-29

This method for measuring heave avoids the errors that can occur if you filter direct heave measurements

made from a point remote from the vessel centre of rotation.

Measure and record the distance from your reference point to the vessel centre of rotation.

• A positive value for the X lever arm means the vessel centre of rotation is forward of your

reference point

• A positive value for the Y lever arm means the vessel centre of rotation is to starboard of your

reference point

• A positive value for the Z lever arm means the vessel centre of rotation is below your reference

point

Antenna Separation

The scalar antenna separation distance may be measured to an accuracy of 5 mm (~¼ in), although this

is not necessary as this value will be computed by POS MV as part of the GAMS calibration process.To

measure the antenna separation distance manually, use one of the following methods:

• Use a tape measure to measure the separation distance between the geometric centres of the

antennas; that is between the centres of both antenna domes.

• Stretch a non-elastic string or wire between the GNSS antennas. Mark the string or wire where it

crosses the centres of the antenna domes. Remove the string or wire and measure the distance

between the marks.

Note: Both methods assume there is a straight unobstructed vector between both antennas.

Mounting Angles

General

Measure and record the mounting angles relative to the reference frame that you have chosen. Resolve

these angles into three rotations that you must apply, in a strictly defined sequence, to align the mounting

angles with your chosen reference frame. The Tate-Bryant sequence of rotations is used.

Tate-Bryant Rotation Sequence

Apply the rotation in the following order to bring the two frames of

reference into complete alignment:

• Heading rotation - apply a right-hand screw rotation θz about

the z-axis to align one frame with the other

• Pitch rotation - apply a right-hand screw rotation θy about the

once-rotated y-axis to align one frame with the other

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-30

• Roll rotation - apply a right-hand screw rotation θx about the

twice-rotated x-axis to align one frame with the other

Frames of Reference

The IMU frame of reference includes the vertical and the horizontal

axis of the IMU with which the orthogonal array of sensing

elements aligns. These are fixed relative to the IMU and are

identified by a label on the IMU housing.

By convention, POS MV uses the right-hand orthogonal co-

ordinate system, with its origin centred on the black and yellow

circle on the top of the IMU.

The sensor 1 reference frame includes the vertical and the

horizontal axis of the multibeam transducer. These axis are fixed

relative to the multibeam transducer.

By convention, POS MV uses the right-hand orthogonal coordinate

system, with its origin at the sensing centre of the multibeam

transducer.

The vessel reference frame co-aligns with your chosen reference

frame.

Right-Hand Orthogonal System

The right-hand orthogonal system defines the following:

• The x-axis is in the fore-aft direction in the appropriate

reference frame

• The y-axis is perpendicular to the x-axis and points towards

the right (starboard) side in the appropriate reference frame

• The z-axis points downwards in the appropriate reference

frame

Figure 12 shows an example of a frame centred on the vessel and

aligned with its surveyed fore-aft, port-starboard and vertical axis.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-31

y = Horizonral

(port-stbd line) x = Horizonral

(fore-aft line)

z = Vertical

Centre of

vessel



Figure 12: Right-Hand Orthogonal System

The mounting angles describe the relative angles between one frame and another, for example between

your reference frame and the IMU frame. The following examples use the mounting angles between your

chosen reference frame and the IMU frame to illustrate how to measure and apply these parameters.

The examples use the following assumptions:

• The IMU is installed so that it has a permanent roll angle of -5° relative to your reference frame.

That is, if you consider your reference frame as level, then the port edge of the IMU is lower than

the starboard edge.

• The IMU is installed so that it has a permanent pitch angle of +2° relative to your reference frame.

That is, if you consider your reference frame as level, then the bow edge of the IMU is higher than

the stern edge.

The circular label on the top of the IMU identifies the directions of the IMU x and y-axis.

Example 1 - The IMU x-axis nominally points towards the x-axis of the chosen reference frame, but with a

small yaw offset so that the IMU has a 3° clockwise rotation relative to your reference frame. Record the

following:

• +3° for the IMU with respect to reference frame z mounting angle

• +2° for the IMU with respect to reference frame y mounting angle

• -5° for the IMU with respect to reference frame x mounting angle

Example 2 - The IMU x-axis nominally points towards the starboard side of the chosen reference frame,

but with a small yaw offset so that the IMU has a 3° clockwise rotation relative to the y-axis of your

reference frame. Record the following:

• +93° for the IMU with respect to reference frame z mounting angle

• +2° for the IMU with respect to reference frame y mounting angle

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-32

• -5° for the IMU with respect to reference frame x mounting angle

IMU with respect to Reference Frame

Measure and record the rotations that you must apply, using the Tate-Bryant sequence explained above,

to align your chosen reference frame with the IMU reference frame.

Sensor 1 with respect to Reference Frame

Sensor 1 is typically a multibeam transducer. Measure and record the rotations that you must apply, using

the Tate-Bryant sequence explained above, to align your chosen reference frame with the sensor 1

frame.

Sensor 2 with respect to Reference Frame

Measure and record the rotations that you must apply, using the Tate-Bryant sequence explained above,

to align your chosen reference frame with the sensor 2 frame.

Note: If your application does not use a second sensor, record these mounting angles as zero.

Installation Checklist

This checklist is included to help you install the POS MV efficiently and with minimal disruption to the

vessel, its crew or any ongoing operations.

After installing the system correctly and all items have been checked against this list, refer to the

Interfaces and Data Formats description starting on page 3-1 to configure and start using the POS MV.

1. Mechanical Interface

a) IMU Positioning:

Mount the IMU as close as possible to the multibeam transducer.

Mount the IMU rigidly so that it cannot move or rotate

independently of the vessel.

Install the IMU where the data and power cable will reach easily

between the IMU and the PCS.

Ensure there is sufficient clearance for the connectors at both

ends of the data and power cable. Tighten the connectors by

hand only.

Mount the IMU so that it is approximately level.

Do not immerse the IMU in water or any liquid.

Respect the environmental limits listed for the Inertial

Measurement Unit on page 2-4 for storage and operation.

Refer to the Drawings section on page E-1 for dimensional

details to help when you install the IMU.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-33

Connect the IMU housing to a good ground connection.

b) PCS Positioning:

Protect the PCS from shock, vibration and moisture.

Allow easy access to the front and the rear panels of the PCS.

Refer to the Drawings section on page E-1 for dimensional

details to help when you install the PCS.

Connect the primary GNSS antenna to the ANT1 port.

Connect the secondary GNSS antenna to the ANT2 port

If necessary, connect the Differential GNSS corrections to a

COM port.

Connect the IMU data and power cable to the IMU port.

(POS MV V5) Connect an electrical supply of nominal voltage

110/220V (voltage range - 90 Vac to 264 Vac) to the 3-pin IEC

mains inlet connector on the PCS. The PCS uses an auto-

switching power supply that configures itself to the applied ac

electrical supply.

(POS MV V5-1) Connect an electrical supply of nominal voltage

Error! Reference source not found. (voltage range - 10 Vdc to

34 Vdc) to the 3-pin power inlet connector on the PCS.

c) GNSS Antenna Positioning:

Ensure there is a horizontal separation distance of between 1.0

and 5.0 m (~3 ¼ and ~16 ½ ft) between the primary and the

secondary GNSS antennas.

Mount the antennas as high as possible on the vessel.

Do not mount the antennas close to MF, HF, VHF or UHF

transmitters or antennas. Do not mount the GNSS antennas

within 0.5 m (~±19 ¾ in) of radar or satellite communications

equipment.

Avoid mounting the antennas near large flat surfaces.

Avoid mounting the antennas in a location where they may move,

twist or vibrate significantly relative to the vessel or the IMU.

2. Offset Measurements

Measure the lever arm distances and mounting angles, as

instructed in Lever Arm Distances on page 2-26 and Mounting

Angles on page 2-29. Be as careful and accurate as possible.

Measure the GNSS antenna separation distance, as instructed in

Antenna Separation on page 2-29. Be as careful and accurate as

possible.

3. Power Supply

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Installation

2-34

The application of incorrect electrical power to the PCS may

result in damage to POS MV system.

(POS MV V5) Arrange a clean, stable electrical supply at a

nominal voltage 110/220V (voltage range - 90 Vac to 264 Vac)

for the PCS. If possible, supply electrical power to the PCS from

an uninterruptible power supply.

(POS MV V5-1) Arrange a clean, stable electrical supply at a

nominal voltage Error! Reference source not found. (voltage

range 10 Vdc to 34 Vdc) for the PCS. If possible, supply electrical

power to the PCS from an uninterruptible power supply.

4. Cable Runs

Install all cables carefully so that they do not present a hazard.

Avoid applying sharp bends or other mechanical stresses to the

cables when you install them. Do not run cables where they may

bend or twist after installation. Use cable clips to secure the

cables at regular intervals along their length.

If you need to extend any cables, use approved cables and

connectors of the highest quality. Refer to Applanix for advice,

see Technical Support and Service on page A-1 for procedures.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-1

3.0 Interfaces and Data Formats

This section of the manual describes the data formats for each of the following interface ports on the POS

Computer System (PCS) rear panel.

Note: Each port has a different format. To avoid operating problems, give careful attention to the

structure of each interface.

LAN (Ethernet) Data

The POS MV 10/100/1000BaseT Ethernet interface conforms to the Institute of Electrical and Electronics

Engineers (IEEE) 802.3i standard. It allows you to configure the system and to monitor its status during

operation.

The interface comprises four ports:

• Control port - used to transmit configuration information to POS MV

• Display port - provides navigation and attitude information at a low update rate for use by the MV-

POSView Controller program running on a separate PC

• Real-time data port - provides the same information as the display port, but at a higher update

rate for use by other computers on a shared Ethernet LAN

• Logging data port - provides the same information as the display port, but is buffered for robust

logging by other computers on a shared Ethernet LAN

POS MV broadcasts information from the display and real-time data port using the Universal Datagram

Protocol (UDP) protocol, and the logging data port using the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)

protocol. Information is organised into a data group structure and each port may be configured

independently to permit the output of selected data groups.

The MV-POSView Controller program configures the groups transmitted through the display port

automatically according to the specific windows that the program has open at any one time. The group

structure is therefore user transparent. POS MV enables groups automatically to support the demands

that you make by opening windows within the controller program.

COM Ports

The four RS-232 serial ports, COM(1) through COM(4), allow communication between the PCS and

external equipment. Two of the four COM ports are software switchable between the RS-232 and RS-422

protocols. Two of the four COM ports are software switchable to connect with the internal GNSS receiver

COM ports. All COM ports are assignable for input and/or output. The following identifies the available

port assignments:

• NMEA sentence types

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-2

• Binary data formats

• Base 1 and 2 GNSS outputs

• Base 1 and 2 GNSS inputs

• Auxiliary 1 and 2 GNSS inputs

• GNSS 1 and 2 COM port access

Table 12 identifies the default COM port settings.

Table 12: Default COM Port Settings

Baud Rate

9600

Parity

None

Data Bits

8 Bits

Stop Bits

1 Bit

Flow Control

None

Output Select

None

Input Select

None

Note: Baud rates may require different settings, other than the default settings, for the transmission of various

sentence formats.

NMEA Data Formats

The PCS can be configured to use any number of the four COM ports to output data using the National

Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) 0183 format at rates up to 50 Hz. POS MV makes twelve

sentence formats available.

1. $xxGGA: global system position fix data

2. $xxGGK: time, position, position type and DOP values

3. $xxHDT: heading - true data

4. $xxVTG: course over ground and ground speed data

5. $xxGST: GNSS pseudorange noise statistics

6. $xxRMC:

7. a) $PASHR: attitude data

b) $PASHR-TSS: attitude data (TSS indicates the use of the TSS standard instead of the Tate-

Bryant standard, see page 2-29 for a description)

8. a) $PRDID: attitude data

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-3

b) $PRDID-TSS: attitude data (TSS indicates the use of the TSS standard instead of the Tate-

Bryant standard, see page 2-29 for a description)

9. $xxZDA: time and date

10. $UTC: time and date

11. $xxPPS: time and offset

12. UTC: date and time (Trimble UTC format)

Note: The initial two characters following the $ (noted as “xx” above) may be configured to either “IN”

or “GP”. Although “IN” is more correct in the context of a GNSS aided inertial navigation system,

some third party software applications may accept only “GP”.

Use the MV-POSView Controller program to set the system to output one or more of these sentences, as

well as to set the output frequency of these sentences.

Note: System performance may degrade if multiple ports are configured for high rate output

simultaneously.

Note: $PASHR and $PASHR-TSS are mutually exclusive; as are $PRDID and $PRDID-TSS.

Information supplied through the COM port is valid for the point described by the vessel lever arms and

mounting angles, as selected by the user.

NMEA Sentence Formats

$xxGGA: Global Positioning Fix Data

Time and position fix related data. POS MV supplies information using the following American

Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) NMEA 0183 sentence format.

$xxGGA,hhmmss.sss,llll.lllll,a,yyyyy.yyyyy,b,t,nn,v.v,xxxxx.xx,M,,,ccc,rrrr*hh<CRLF>

Table 13: $xxGGA Sentence Format

Item

Definition

Value

Units (If Applicable)

$xxGGA

Header

$xxGGA

hhmmss.sss

UTC time of

position

N/A

hours|minutes|seconds|decimal seconds

2 fixed digits for hours

2 fixed digits for minutes

2 fixed digits for seconds

3 digits for decimal seconds

llll.lllll

Latitude

0 to 90

degrees|minutes|decimal minutes

2 fixed digits for degrees

2 fixed digits for minutes

5 digits for decimal minutes

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-4

$xxGGA,hhmmss.sss,llll.lllll,a,yyyyy.yyyyy,b,t,nn,v.v,xxxxx.xx,M,,,ccc,rrrr*hh<CRLF>

Table 13: $xxGGA Sentence Format

Item

Definition

Value

Units (If Applicable)

N (North) or S

(South)

N or S

yyyyy.yyyyy

Longitude

0 to 180

degrees|minutes|decimal minutes

3 fixed digits for degrees

2 fixed digits for minutes

5 digits for decimal minutes

E (East) or W

(West)

E or W

GNSS quality

indicator

0 = fix not available or invalid

1 = C/A standard GNSS; fix valid

2 = DGNSS mode; fix valid

3 = GNSS PPS mode; fix valid

4 = RTK fixed

5 = RTK float

6 = free inertial

Number of

satellites used

in the fix

0 to 32

v.v

Horizontal

dilution of

precision

xxxxx.xx

Altitude above

or below mean

sea level; a

negative value

indicates below

sea level

N/A

metres

Units of

measure =

metres

Null

ccc

Age of

differential

corrections in

seconds since

last RTCM-104

message

0 to 999

seconds

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-5

$xxGGA,hhmmss.sss,llll.lllll,a,yyyyy.yyyyy,b,t,nn,v.v,xxxxx.xx,M,,,ccc,rrrr*hh<CRLF>

Table 13: $xxGGA Sentence Format

Item

Definition

Value

Units (If Applicable)

rrrr

DGNSS

reference

station identity

0000 to

1023

*hh

Checksum

<CRLF>

Carriage return

and line feed

<CRLF>

Note: Commas separate all items, including null fields. The information is valid at the location of the vessel frame.

$xxGGK: Time, Position, Position Type and DOP Values

The message string is shown below.

$xxGGK,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,llll.llllllll,a,yyyyy.yyyyyyyy,b,t,nn,v.v,x.xxx,M*hh<CRLF>

Table 14: $xxGGK Sentence Format

Item

Definition

Value

Units (If Applicable)

$xxGGK

Header

$xxGGK

hhmmss.ss

UTC of

position fix

N/A

hours|minutes|seconds|decimal seconds

2 fixed digits for hours

2 fixed digits for minutes

2 fixed digits for seconds

2 digits for decimal seconds

mmddyy

UTC date of

position

N/A

month|day|year

2 fixed digits for month

2 fixed digits for day

2 fixed digits for year

llll.llllllll

Latitude

0 to 90

degrees|minutes|decimal minutes

2 fixed digits for degrees

2 fixed digits for minutes

8 digits for decimal minutes

Direction of

latitude

N or S

yyyyy.yyyyyyyy

Longitude

0 to 180

degrees|minutes|decimal minutes

3 fixed digits for degrees

2 fixed digits for minutes

8 digits for decimal minutes

Direction of

longitude

E or W

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-6

$xxGGK,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,llll.llllllll,a,yyyyy.yyyyyyyy,b,t,nn,v.v,x.xxx,M*hh<CRLF>

Table 14: $xxGGK Sentence Format

Item

Definition

Value

Units (If Applicable)

GNSS quality

indicator

0 = fix not available or invalid

1 = C/A standard GNSS; fix valid

2 = RTK float

3 = RTK fixed

4 = DGNSS mode; fix valid

5 = free inertial

Number of

satellites used

in GNSS

solution

0 to 32

v.v

DOP of fix

x.xxx

Ellipsoid

height of fix

(vessel height

above WGS84

ellipsoid)

N/A

metres|decimal metres

1 fixed digit for metres

3 fixed digits for decimal metres

Ellipsoid

height

N/A

metres

*hh

Checksum

<CRLF>

Carriage

return and line

feed

<CRLF>

$xxHDT: Heading - True Data

True vessel heading is in degrees. POS MV supplies information in the following ASCII NMEA

0183 sentence format.

$xxHDT,xxx.x,T*hh<CRLF>

Table 15: $xxHDT Sentence Format

Item

Definition

Value

Units (If Applicable)

$xxHDT

Header

$xxHDT

xxx.x

True vessel

heading in the

vessel frame

000.0 to 359.9

degrees|decimal degrees

3 fixed digits for degrees

1 digit for decimal degrees

True

*hh

Checksum

N/A

<CRLF>

Carriage return

and line feed

<CRLF>

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-7

$xxVTG: Course Over Ground and Ground Speed Data

Actual course and speed relative to the ground. POS MV supplies information in the following

ASCII NMEA 0183 sentence format.

$xxVTG,xxx.x,T,,M,n.n,N,k.k,K*hh<CRLF>

Table 16: $xxVTG Sentence Format

Item

Definition

Value

Units (If Applicable)

$xxVTG

Header

$xxVTG

xxx.x

True vessel

track in the

vessel frame

000.0 to 359.9

degrees|decimal degrees

3 fixed digits for degrees

1 digit for decimal degrees

True

Null

Not supported

null

n.n

Speed in the

vessel frame

N/A

knots

Knots

k.k

Speed in the

vessel frame

N/A

km/h

Kilometres per

hour

*hh

Checksum

N/A

<CRLF>

Carriage return

and line feed

<CRLF>

Note: Commas separate all items, including null fields.

$xxGST: GNSS Pseudorange Noise Statistics

GNSS pseudorange noise statistics indicate the quality of the position solution delivered by the

integrated navigation solution. POS MV supplies information in the following ASCII NMEA 0183

sentence format.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-8

$xxGST,hhmmss.sss,,smjr.smjr,smnr.smnr,ooo.o,l.l,y.y,a.a

*hh<CRLF>

Table 17: $xxGST Sentence Format

Item

Definition

Value

Units (If Applicable)

$xxGST

Header

$xxGST

hhmmss.sss

UTC time of

position

N/A

hours|minutes|seconds|decimal

seconds

2 fixed digits for hours

2 fixed digits for minutes

2 fixed digits for seconds

3 digits for decimal seconds

Null

Not supported

null

smjr.smjr

Standard

deviation of

semi-major axis

of error ellipse

N/A

metres

smnr.smnr

Standard

deviation of

semi-minor axis

of error ellipse

N/A

metres

ooo.o

Orientation of

semi major axis

of error ellipse

000.0 to

359.9

degrees from true north

l.l

Standard

deviation of

latitude

N/A

metres

y.y

Standard

deviation of

longitude

N/A

metres

a.a

Standard

deviation of

altitude

N/A

metres

*hh

Checksum

N/A

<CRLF>

Carriage return

and line feed

<CRLF>

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-9

Indicated

position

0.0

True

North

Error ellipse

smnr.smnr

smjr.smjr

y.y

l.l

Figure 13: $xxGST Sentence Nomenclature

NMEA Port RMC Message Format

The RMC navigation data are output in the following ASCII NMEA format. Note the 2 fields describing

magnetic variation are not included and are therefore left null.

Table 18: NMEA RMC Message Format

$xxRMC,hhmmss.ssss,v,llll.lllll,a,yyyyy.yyyyy,b,sssss.s,

hhh.h,ddmmyy,,,c*hh<CR><LF>

Items

Definition

Values

Units

$xxRMC

Header with

talker ID

$ttRMC

tt = IN or GP

hhmmss.ssss

UTC time of

navigation data

NRG

hours / minutes /

seconds. decimal sec

A (Valid) or V

(Not valid)

A or V

N/A

llll.lllll

Latitude

0o to 90o

degrees / minutes.

decimal min

N (North) or S

(South)

N or S

N/A

yyyyy.yyyyy

Longitude

0o to 180o

degrees / minutes.

decimal min

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-10

Table 18: NMEA RMC Message Format

$xxRMC,hhmmss.ssss,v,llll.lllll,a,yyyyy.yyyyy,b,sssss.s,

hhh.h,ddmmyy,,,c*hh<CR><LF>

Items

Definition

Values

Units

E (East) or W

(West)

E or W

N/A

sssss.s

Speed in knots

NRG

knots

hhh.h

Heading

0o to 359.9o

degrees

ddmmyy

Date of

navigation data

NRG

days/

months/

year

Mode indicator

See Table 43

N/A

*hh

Checksum

Hexadecimal

value

N/A

Carriage return &

Line feed

N/A

NRG stands for No Range Given.

Table 19: RMC Mode Indicator Values

Value

RMC Mode

Autonomous

Differential

Dead reckoning

Not valid

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-11

$PASHR ($PASHR-TSS): Attitude Data

POS MV supplies attitude data information in the following ASCII NMEA sentence format.

$PASHR,hhmmss.sss,xxx.xx,T,RRR.RR,PPP.PP,HHH.HH,

a.aaa,b.bbb,c.ccc,d,e*hh<CRLF>

Table 20: $PASHR Sentence Format

Item

Definition

Value

Units (If Applicable)

$PASHR

Header

$PASHR

hhmmss.sss

UTC time of

data string

N/A

hours|minutes|seconds|decimal

seconds

• 2 fixed digits for hours

• 2 fixed digits for minutes

• 2 fixed digits for seconds

• 3 digits for decimal seconds

xxx.xx

True vessel

heading

0 to

359.99

degrees

True

RRR.RR

Roll

-90.00 to

+90.00

degrees

PPP.PP

Pitch

-90.00 to

+90.00

degrees

HHH.HH

Heave

-99.00 to

+99.00

metres

a.aaa

Accuracy roll

0 to

9.999

degrees

b.bbb

Accuracy pitch

0 to

9.999

degrees

c.ccc

Accuracy

heading

0 to

9.999

degrees

Flag -

accuracy

heading

0, 1, 2

0 = no aiding

1 = GNSS aiding

2 = GNSS & GAMS aiding

Flag - IMU

0, 1

0 = IMU out

1 = satisfactory

*hh

Checksum

N/A

<CRLF>

Carriage return

and line feed

<CRLF>

Note: Commas separate all items. Two attitude data strings are available. The strings are identical except for the

definition of roll and pitch angles. One string uses Tate-Bryant angles and the other uses TSS angles. Use the MV-

POSView Controller program to set the required angle convention. Refer to COM Port Set-up on page 4-13 for

instructions and Mounting Angles on page 2-29 for a definition of the Tate-Bryant angles. The information is valid in

the vessel frame, except for heave, which is valid in the sensor 1 frame.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-12

$PRDID ($PRDID-TSS): Attitude Data

POS MV supplies attitude data information in the following ASCII NMEA sentence format.

$PRDID,PPP.PP,RRR.RR,xxx.xx*hh <CRLF>

Table 21: $PRDID Sentence Format

Item

Definition

Value

Units (If Applicable)

$PRDID

Header

$PRDID

PPP.PP

Pitch

-90.00 to +90.00

degrees

RRR.RR

Roll

-90.00 to +90.00

degrees

xxx.xx

Sensor heading

0 to 359.99

degrees

*hh

Checksum

N/A

<CRLF>

Carriage return

and line feed

<CRLF>

Note: Commas separate all items. Two attitude data strings are available. The strings are identical except for the

definition of roll and pitch angles. One string uses Tate-Bryant angles and the other uses TSS angles. Use the MV-

POSView Controller program to set the required angle convention. Refer to COM Port Set-up on page 4-13 for

instructions and Mounting Angles on page 2-29 for a definition of the Tate-Bryant angles. The information is valid in

the vessel frame, except for heave, which is valid in the sensor 1 frame.

$xxZDA: Time and Date

POS MV supplies time and date information in the following ASCII NMEA sentence format.

$xxZDA,hhmmss.ssss,DD,MM,YYYY,,*hh<CRLF>

Table 22: $xxZDA Sentence Format

Item

Definition

Value

Units (If Applicable)

$xxZDA

Header

$xxZDA

hhmmss.ssss

UTC time

N/A

hours|minutes|seconds|decimal

seconds

• 2 fixed digits for hours

• 2 fixed digits for minutes

• 2 fixed digits for seconds

• 4 digits for decimal seconds

Day of month

01 to 31

Month of year

01 to 12

YYYY

Year

Null

*hh

Checksum

N/A

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-13

$xxZDA,hhmmss.ssss,DD,MM,YYYY,,*hh<CRLF>

Table 22: $xxZDA Sentence Format

Item

Definition

Value

Units (If Applicable)

<CRLF>

Carriage return

and line feed

<CRLF>

Note: Commas separate all items.

$UTC: Time and Date

POS MV supplies UTC time and date information in the following ASCII NMEA sentence format.

$UTC,YYYYMMDD,hhmmss.ssss,*hh<CRLF>

Table 23: $UTC Sentence Format

Item

Definition

Value

Units (If Applicable)

$UTC

Header

$UTC

YYYY

Year

Month

01 to 12

Day

01 to 31

hhmmss.ssss

UTC time

000000.0000

235959.9999

hours|minutes|seconds|

decimal seconds

• 2 fixed digits for hours

• 2 fixed digits for minutes

• 2 fixed digits for seconds

• 4 digits for decimal seconds

*hh

Checksum

N/A

<CRLF>

Carriage

return and

line feed

<CRLF>

Note: Commas separate all items.

$xxPPS: Time and Offset

POS MV supplies UTC time and GPS Time offset information in the following ASCII NMEA

sentence format.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-14

$xxPPS,hhmmss.ssss,d,wwww,uu.uu,pppp,*hh<CRLF>

Table 24: $xxPPS Sentence Format

Item

Definition

Value

Units (If Applicable)

$xxPPS

Header

$xxPPS

hhmmss.ssss

UTC time

000000.0000

235959.9999

hours|minutes|seconds|

decimal seconds

• 2 fixed digits for hours

• 2 fixed digits for minutes

• 2 fixed digits for seconds

• 4 digits for decimal seconds

Offset

dayN1

0 to 6

wwww

GNSS

week

number

0000 to 9999

uu.uu

Offset of

GPS Time

from UTC

timeN2

00.00 to

99.99

seconds|decimal seconds

• 2 fixed digits for seconds

• 2 digits for decimal seconds

pppp

PPS

countN3

1 to n

*hh

Checksum

N/A

<CRLF>

Carriage

return and

line feed

<CRLF>

N1 First day of week (Sunday) = 0.

N2 GPS Time = UTC time + UTC offset.

N3 Variable length.

Note: Commas separate all items.

UTC: Date and Time (Trimble format)

POS MV supplies UTC date and time information in the following Trimble ASCII sentence

format.

UTC YY.MM.DD hh:mm:ss ab<CRLF>

Table 25: UTC Sentence Format

Item

Definition

Value

Units (If Applicable)

UTC

Header

UTC

Year

00 to 99

Month

01 to 12

Day

01 to 31

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-15

UTC YY.MM.DD hh:mm:ss ab<CRLF>

Table 25: UTC Sentence Format

Item

Definition

Value

Units (If Applicable)

hh:mm:ss

UTC time

00:00:00 to

23:59:59

hours:minutes:seconds

• 2 fixed digits for hours

• 2 fixed digits for minutes

• 2 fixed digits for seconds

Position fix

type

1 to 5 or ?

1 – time only

2 – 1D & time

3 – unused

4 – 2D & time

5 – 3D & time

? – no SV tracked, time based

on receiver clock

# of SV

tracked

≥ 1 or ?

? – no SV tracked, time based

on receiver clock

<CRLF>

Carriage

return and

line feed

<CRLF>

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-16

Binary Data Formats

The PCS outputs attitude data using any of the following output string formats (any number of COM ports

can be independently configured for Binary output):

1. TSS1 format

2. Simrad 1000 format using Tate-Bryant or TSS angles

3. Simrad 3000 format using Tate-Bryant or TSS angles

4. TSM 5265 format using Tate-Bryant or TSS angles

5. Atlas format

6. PPS format

7. Time of PPS format (copy of Novatel TM1B)

Output String Formats

The following descriptions include the update rate for each output format. To achieve these update rates,

you must set an appropriate communication speed for the COM port.

Note: System performance may degrade if multiple ports are configured for high rate output

simultaneously.

Information supplied through the COM port is valid for the point described by the sensor 1 or sensor 2

lever arms and mounting angles, as selected by the user.

TSS1 Format

Format TSS1 consists of five fields and contains 27 ASCII characters. Each record begins with a

start character and ends with the two-character carriage-return line-feed sequence. All fields

contain measurements in real-world units; POS MV supplies acceleration measurements in

ASCII coded hexadecimal values and heave, roll and pitch as ASCII coded decimal values. You

can use the MV-POSView Controller program to change the sense of the roll, pitch and heave

outputs. POS MV supplies information in the following format.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-17

:XXAAAASMHHHHQMRRRRSMPPPP<CRLF>

Table 26: TSS1 Output Format

Field

Definition

Value

Units (If Applicable)

Start of packet

character

3A hex

ASCII

Horizontal

acceleration

0 to +9.81 cm/s2

3.83 cm/s2

AAAA

Vertical

acceleration

0 to +40.96 cm/s2

0.0625 cm/s2

Space character

20 hex

ASCII

MHHHH

Heave

-99 to +99 m

1 cm

Status flag

U = unaided mode - settled condition

u = unaided mode - settling

G = GNSS aided mode - settled condition

g = GNSS aided mode - settling

H = heading aided mode - settled condition

h = heading aided mode - settling

F = full aided mode - settled condition

f = full aided mode - settling

MRRRR

Roll

-90 to +90°

0.01°

Space character

20 hex

ASCII

MPPPP

Pitch

-90 to +90°

0.01°

<CRLF>

Carriage return

& line feed

0D hex and 0A

hex

ASCII

Note 1: M = space if positive or minus if negative. You can use the MV-POSView Controller program to change the

sense of the roll, pitch and heave outputs.

Note 2: POS MV sends records using the TSS1 format at an update rate from one to 200 Hz. It updates the TOV at

the same rate. The recommended minimum baud rate for use with this format is 9600 baud at 25 Hz.

Simrad 1000 Format

You can use this format with the Simrad 1000 multibeam sonar. The MV-POSView Controller

program is used to select the TSS or the Tate-Bryant convention of rotations for the attitude

measurement. Refer to page 2-29 for an explanation of these conventions.

The Simrad attitude data are a 10-byte message with the following format.

• Sync format: 90 hex

• Roll format: 2’s complement, LSB = 0.01°, roll sense is user selectable from the MV-

POSView Controller program

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-18

• Pitch format: 2’s complement, LSB = 0.01°, pitch sense is user selectable from the

MV-POSView Controller program

• Heave format: 2’s complement, LSB = 1 cm, heave sense is user selectable from the

MV-POSView Controller program

• Heading format: LSB = 0.01°, 0 to 359.99°, positive = clockwise

A frame of Simrad digital attitude data, as supplied by the POS MV, has the format shown in

Table 27.

Table 27: Simrad 1000 Digital Output Format

Item

Byte

Value

Units (If Applicable)

Header LSB

Header MSB

0x00

0x99

N/A

Roll LSB

Roll MSB

±180°

0.01°

Pitch LSB

Pitch MSB

±180°

0.01°

Heave LSB

Heave MSB

±327 m

1 cm

Heading LSB

Heading MSB

0 to 359.99°

0.01°

Note: POS MV sends records using the Simrad 1000 format at an update rate from one to 200 Hz; TOV is updated

at the same rate. The recommended minimum baud rate for use with this format is 19200 baud at 100 Hz.

Simrad 3000 Format

You can use this format with the Simrad 3000 multibeam sonar. The MV-POSView Controller

program is used to select the TSS or the Tate-Bryant convention of rotations for the attitude

measurement. Refer to page 2-29 for an explanation of these conventions.

The Simrad attitude data are a 12-byte message with the following format.

• Status format: 99 hex

• Sync format: 90 hex

• Roll format: 2’s complement, LSB = 0.01°, roll sense is user selectable from the MV-

POSView Controller program

• Pitch format: 2’s complement, LSB = 0.01°, pitch sense is user selectable from the

MV-POSView Controller program

• Heave format: 2’s complement, LSB = 1 cm, heave sense is user selectable from the

MV-POSView Controller program

• Heading format: LSB = 0.01°, 0 to 359.99°, positive = clockwise

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-19

A frame of Simrad digital attitude data, as supplied by the POS MV, has the format shown in

Table 28.

Table 28: Simrad 3000 Digital Output Format

Item

Byte

Value

Units (If Applicable)

Header LSB

Header MSB

0x00

0x90

N/A

Roll LSB

Roll MSB

±180°

0.01°

Pitch LSB

Pitch MSB

±180°

0.01°

Heave LSB

Heave MSB

±327 m

1 cm

Heading LSB

Heading MSB

0 to 359.99°

0.01°

Note: POS MV sends records using the Simrad 3000 format at an update rate from one to 200 Hz; TOV is updated

at the same rate. The recommended minimum baud rate for use with this format is 19200 baud at 100 Hz.

TSM 5265 Format

You can use this format with the Thompson TSM 5265 multibeam sonar. The output message

supplies the sonar with a time tag (roll, pitch and heave), heading and sonar velocity. POS MV

updates the message and the TOV from one to 200 times per second.

The message is a 24-byte data string with the following format.

• Header: 90 hex

• Time tag: double precision float, UTC time in seconds of the week

• Roll format: 2’s complement, LSB = 0.01°, roll sense is user selectable from the MV-

POSView Controller program

• Pitch format: 2’s complement, LSB = 0.01°, pitch sense is user selectable from the

MV-POSView Controller program

• Heave format: 2’s complement, LSB = 1 cm, heave sense is user selectable from the

MV-POSView Controller program

• Heading format: LSB = 0.01°, 0 to 359.99°, positive = clockwise

• Longitudinal velocity format: 2’s complement, LSB = 0.1 cm/s, positive = forward

• Transverse velocity format: 2’s complement, LSB = 0.1 cm/s, positive = starboard

• Down velocity format: 2’s complement, LSB = 0.1 cm/s, positive = down

The recommended minimum baud rate for use with this format is 38400 baud at 100 Hz.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-20

You can use the MV-POSView Controller program to change the sense of the roll, pitch and

heave outputs. You can also select the TSS or the Tate-Bryant convention of rotations for the

attitude measurement. Refer to page 2-29 for instructions to do this and for an explanation of the

TSS and Tate-Bryant conventions.

The time tag attached to the data is Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) time in seconds of the

week. For the purposes of this feature, a week begins on Sunday morning so that the first

second occurs at 00:00:01 UTC.

A frame of TSM 5265 digital attitude data, as supplied by the POS MV, has the format shown in

Table 29.

Table 29: TSM 5265 Digital Output Format

Item

Byte

Value

Units (If Applicable)

Header LBS

Header MSB

0x00

0x90

N/A

Time tag

2 to 9

seconds

Roll LSB

Roll MSB

±180°

0.01°

Pitch LSB

Pitch MSB

±180°

0.01°

Heave LSB

Heave MSB

±327 m

1 cm

Heading LSB

Heading MSB

0 to

359.99°

0.01°

Longitudinal velocity LSB

±32.8

m/s

0.1 cm/s

Longitudinal velocity MSB

Transverse velocity LSB

±32.8

m/s

0.1 cm/s

Transverse velocity MSB

Down velocity LSB

±32.8

m/s

0.1 cm/s

Down velocity MSB

Atlas Format

The Atlas format consists of a series of fields of 16-bit 2’s complement numbers expressed as

two binary-coded digits.

POS MV supplies attitude measurements in units of 0.0054931641° (=360°/65536).

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-21

The system uses millimetres for measurements of heave. You can use the MV-POSView

Controller program to change the roll, pitch and heave sense outputs. POS MV supplies

information in the following format.

DLERrPpHhQDLE

Table 30: Atlas Output Format

Field

Definition

Value

Units (If Applicable)

DLE

Start of packet

character

10 hex

ASCII

Roll MSB

Roll LSB

+90 to -90°

0.00549°

Pitch MSB

Pitch LSB

+90 to -90°

0.00549°

Heave MSB

Heave LSB

+9999 to -9999

Status flag

0 = unaided mode - settled condition

1 = unaided mode - settling

2 = GNSS aided mode - settled condition

3 = GNSS aided mode - settling

4 = heading aided mode - settled condition

5 = heading aided mode - settling

6 = full aided mode - settled condition

7 = full aided mode - settling

DLE

Stop character

10 hex

ASCII

Note: POS MV sends records using the Atlas format at an update rate from one to 200 Hz. The recommended

minimum baud rate for use with this format is from 9600 to 19200 baud at 50 Hz.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-22

PPS Format

Table 31: PPS Digital Output Format

Item

Byte

Value

Units (If Applicable)

Header LBS

Header MSB

0x00

0x99

N/A

PPS time (GNSS seconds

into the week, coincident with

PPS strobe [GPS Time])

2 to 9

seconds

Week (GNSS week number)

10 to 13

N/A

UTC offset (offset of GPS

Time from UTC time where

UTC time = GPS Time - UTC

offset)

14 to 17

seconds

PPS count

18 to 21

N/A

Checksum

22 to 23

N/A

Time of PPS Format (copy of Novatel TM1B)

Table 32: Time of PPS Digital Output Format

Item

Byte

Value

Units (If Applicable)

Sync

0xAA

0x44

0x11

N/A

Checksum

N/A

Msg ID

4 to 7

N/A

Bytes

8 to 11

N/A

Week (GNSS week number)

12 to 15

N/A

PPS time (GNSS seconds

into the week, coincident with

PPS strobe [PCS time])

16 to 23

seconds

Clock offset (PCS clock

offset where GPS Time =

PPS time - clock offset)

24 to 31

seconds

Clock offset standard

deviation (standard

deviation of PCS clock offset)

32 to 39

seconds

UTC offset (offset of UTC

time from GPS Time where

UTC time = GPS Time +

UTC offset)

40 to 47

seconds

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Interfaces and Data Formats

3-23

Table 32: Time of PPS Digital Output Format

Item

Byte

Value

Units (If Applicable)

Clock model status (PCS

clock model status where 0 is

valid and values -20 to -1

implies that clock is in

process of stabilization)

48 to 51

N/A

GNSS Ports

The PCS configures the primary and secondary GNSS receiver cards automatically for its own use.

Physical Interface

COM ports 3 and 4 may be configured using the MV-POSView software to allow direct access to the

primary and secondary GNSS receiver cards. Table 33 lists the factory port settings.

Table 33: COM 3 and 4 Port Settings

Setting

Default Value

GNSS Output Rate

1 Hz

Auto Configuration

Enabled

Baud Rate

115200

Parity

None

Data Bits

Stop Bits

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-1

4.0 System Configuration

This section of the manual includes instructions on how to power-on, power-off and configure the Position

and Orientation System for Marine Vessels (POS MV) after installation.

The installation specific parameters described in this section are very important. The accuracy with which

you measure them contributes significantly to the overall accuracy and performance of the system.

Refer to the Installation Parameters topic on page 2-24 for instructions on how to measure the installation

parameters.

Once POS MV is configured using the installation parameters, save the data to Non-Volatile Memory

(NVM) so that the system takes the same configuration each time the POS Computer system (PCS) is

powered-on. The MV-POSView Controller program that provides these functions is contained on the

compact disk supplied with the system. Refer to the Software Installation description on page D-1 for

instructions on how to install the MV-POSView Controller program on your Personal Computer (PC).

Power-On

Once the system is installed and configured, POS MV is ready for operation in a stand-alone mode. This

feature allows POS MV to start processing information after power-on without further need for the

controller program or a controlling PC.

The initial power-on for the POS MV system occurs in two stages:

a) Power-on the POS MV system

b) Power-on the controlling PC and start the MV-POSView Controller program

POS MV Power-On

Power for the POS MV V5 system is applied to the PCS rear panel PWR connector, refer to Figure 14.

Two power switches are available on the PCS; a rear panel PWR switch and a front panel POWER

switch. Enabling the rear panel PWR switch applies operating power to an internal power supply, which in

turn supplies power to the internal electronics stack and to the external Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU)

once the front panel POWER switch is enabled. On the MV V5-1, energizing the power cable connected

to the rear of the PCS applies power to the internal electronics.

The internal electronics stack is the heart of the PCS and interfaces directly with the front panel switches

and indicators. The front panel POWER switch is an alternate action push-and-hold switch; press once for

power-on, press again for power-off. Press and hold the POWER switch until the light illuminates

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-2

indicating that the PCS is powered-on. To power-off, press and hold the POWER switch until the light

starts blinking, then release the switch.

Figure 14: PCS Front and Rear Panels - POS MV V5

Figure 15: POS MV PCS V5-1 PCS Front Panel

Front Panel Status LEDs

Table 34 identifies the functions and status of the various PCS front panel lights.

Table 34: PCS Front Panel Lights

Status light - indicates current status of POS MV:

Steady red:

POS MV failure - shows red when PCS is first

powered-on. Changes to a valid condition when PCS

internal program begins to run, but will turn red again

if there is a fault in PCS.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-3

If a fault occurs, do not power-off PCS. Refer to

Fault Detection window of controller program, see

Fault Identification topic starting on page 9-3.

Steady amber:

Standby mode - POS MV is waiting for instructions.

Flashing amber:

Navigate mode - initialising and aligning attitude

(coarse levelling).

Flashing green:

Navigate mode - degraded attitude performance.

Attitude measurements are acceptable but do not

meet user-set accuracy limits.

Steady green:

Navigate mode - normal system operation. System

meets accuracy limits set by user for position,

velocity, attitude and heading.

Logging light - indicates status of removable logging device.

Steady green:

Removable logging device is active and recording

data.

Steady amber:

Logging media is > 80% full.

Steady red:

Logging has failed – check that there is a USB flash

drive in the logging bay and that the device is not

full.

Power light - illuminates when the PCS is operating.

Initial Power-On Considerations

The POS MV AutoStart feature is enabled prior to shipment from Applanix. The system will transition to

navigate mode automatically after start-up.

Before the system can successfully navigate for first time, the installation parameters measured during

the installation procedures need to be entered; refer to Installation Parameters on page 2-24.

Use the MV-POSView Controller program to enter this information. Save these parameters to NVM if you

require the system to use the same configuration after each power-on sequence. POS MV retrieves these

details from memory after a power-up or after a reset command. Refer to the POS MV Configuration

description on page 4-7 for instructions on configuring the system with installation parameters using the

MV-POSView Controller program.

MV-POSView Controller Program

Refer to the Software Installation appendix, page D-1, for instructions on installing the MV-POSView

Controller program on a PC.

The following assumes that the controlling PC has a suitable version of windows installed and that you

are familiar with its operation. If necessary, refer to the manuals supplied with the controlling PC for

instructions on how to use your version of windows.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-4

• Connect the PCS and the controlling PC to the 10/100/1000 BaseT Ethernet LAN

• Power-on the PCS and the controlling PC, and start Microsoft Windows®; from windows, launch

the MV-POSView Controller program

MV-POSView connects automatically and starts to display information broadcast by the PCS over the

Ethernet if you have installed and configured the PCS, the controlling PC and the MV-POSView

Controller correctly.

The controller program can operate in either of two modes:

• Monitor mode - the MV-POSView Controller program displays all PCS data that is broadcast over

the Ethernet, however, changes to any of the PCS settings cannot be made. This mode allows

several users to monitor the PCS data simultaneously.

• Control mode - the MV-POSView Controller program displays all PCS data that is broadcast over

the Ethernet, and allows changes to the system configuration and the saving of new

configurations to NVM. Only one MV-POSView Controller program can control a given POS at

any time.

MV-POSView Controller - Initial Use

Note: Certain MV-POSView windows have an icon in the lower left corner. They are either all

locked (password protected) or all unlocked (no password). Refer to the Password Protection

description on page 4-27 for more details.

When you install and operate the POS MV for the first time, perform the procedures described in the

following paragraphs.

PCS IP Address

Applanix sets the IP address of the PCS to 192.168.53.100 and the subnet mask to 255.255.255.0.

Initially, to communicate with the PCS, you must give the controlling PC a unique address within the

same subnet. Applanix recommends using address 192.168.53.101.

IP Addresses

IP addresses consist of four sets of numbers separated by full

stops (e.g. 192.168.53.100). The first three sets of numbers are

the network part of the address and the last set of numbers is the

host part. For example, 192.168.53 are the default value for the

PCS network IP address and 100 is the default value for the PCS

host.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-5

To be compatible with a network the first two sets of numbers in

the IP addresses of all items attached to the network must be the

same.

Once communication with the PCS is established you can change the IP address of the PCS to any

suitable address within your subnet. The IP address of the controlling PC may also be reset back to the

original setting. The following paragraphs provide instructions on doing this.

Running the MV-POSView Controller Program

Check the MV-POSView Controller program main window (illustrated in

Figure 35 on page 5-3) for update activity; the window should update at one-second intervals. If not,

check that the LAN light, located on the front panel of the PCS, is flashing green.

Changing Address

It is unlikely that the default IP address of the PCS will be compatible with your local area network.

Therefore, you must change the system IP address before you can exercise control over the POS MV.

Follow the instructions below carefully, noting that you must begin all menu selections from the main

window of the controller.

a) Power-on the PCS, open Windows® and start MV-POSView.

b) On the MV-POSView menu bar, select Tools, Connect.

c) The tool bar shows the current IP address of the PCS Ethernet connection (this address may not

be compatible with your network). Make a written note of this address so that you can change the

address of the controlling PC temporarily to a compatible one. This must be done before you can

communicate with the PCS through the LAN.

d) In MV-POSView, select File, Exit (or press the Alt, F4 keys) to exit MV-POSView.

e) Select the configure option from the Ethernet driver software included with your Windows®

environment.

f) Note the original IP address of the controlling PC so that you can change it back once you have

changed the PCS address.

g) Change the IP address of the controlling PC to one that has the same network identity as the

PCS. Set a new and unique address for the controlling PC (e.g. set the PC to IP address

129.100.1.230).

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-6

h) For some versions of Windows®, the new IP address does not become active until you have

rebooted the PC - Exit Windows® and power-off the controlling PC; wait thirty seconds and

power-on the PC again.

i) Run Windows® and start MV-POSView. In MV-POSView, select Tools, Connect.

j) On MV-POSView menu bar, select Settings, Installation, POS IP Address and insert a new IP

address and/or subnet mask, see Figure 16. The new address must be valid for the network on

which you will operate the PCS. Press the OK button.

k) The new IP address for the PCS will take effect immediately and a ‘Lost connection with POS’

message is displayed at the controlling PC.

l) At the controlling PC, select File, Exit (or press the Alt, F4 keys) to exit the MV-POSView

Controller program.

Figure 16: POSView POS Internet Address

m) Follow the instructions in steps e) and g) above and reset the controlling PC to its original IP

address.

n) Exit Windows® and power-off the controlling PC. Wait thirty seconds and power-on the PC. The

new IP addresses become active during the PC reboot sequence.

o) At completion of the reboot sequence:

• The IP address of the PCS is set to be compatible with your network

• The original IP address to the controlling PC is restored

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-7

POS MV Configuration

Once the POS MV components are installed and the physical installation parameters measured, these

measurements are then entered in to the MV-POSView Controller program. The PCS stores this data in

non-volatile memory for use on subsequent start-ups of POS MV.

The POS MV has a built-in feature that permits automatic fine-tuning of the configuration data. However,

the more accurate the initial physical measurements are the quicker the automatic fine-tuning process.

Figure 17 outlines the configuration data refinement process.

Measure

Installation

Parameters

& Record

Configuration

Data

(Section 2)

Enter Initial

Configuration

Data into

MV-POSView

(Section 4)

Automatic

Fine-tuning of

Configuration

Data

(Section 4)

Auto

Calibration

Vessel

Prescribes a

Figure Eight

Figure 17: Configuration Data Refinement

Automatic fine-tuning permits the accurate measurement of the longitudinal, lateral and vertical distances

between the installed components. Accurate manual measurements are often difficult to obtain and are

subject to errors caused by accessibility. If it is not possible to measure the installation parameters to

within Real-Time Kinematic (RTK) level accuracy (about 2 cm) then the automatic lever arm calibration

feature should be used to improve accuracy. Although only the Reference to Primary GNSS

measurement is presently available, other automatic measurements will be available in the future.

Set the initial configuration of POS MV by performing the following.

a) Connect the PCS and the controlling PC to the 10/100BaseT Ethernet LAN. Both must have

compatible IP addresses; if necessary refer to the Changing Address description on page 4-5 for

instructions on IP addressing.

b) Power-on the PCS and the controlling PC, and start Microsoft Windows®; from windows, launch

the MV-POSView Controller program.

c) Select Tools, Connect on the MV-POSView main window menu bar.

Configuration Data

To configure the POS MV consult the list of installation parameters that was created as you progressed

through the physical installation. Refer to the Installation Parameters description starting on page 2-24 for

detailed instructions.

Configuration - Initial

Note: Select the standby mode prior to changing lever arm or mounting angle values.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-8

From the menu bar of the MV-POSView Controller program, select Settings, Installation, Lever Arms &

Mounting; the Lever Arms & Mounting Angles tab is displayed (see Figure 18). Use metres for lever

arm distances and degrees for misalignment angles.

In circumstances where you do not have the complete set of installation parameters, you must at least

enter values in the Ref. to IMU Lever Arm and the Ref. to primary GNSS Lever Arm panes. This basic

information allows the system to supply useful data to the multibeam sonar.

Figure 18: POSView Lever Arms & Mounting Angles Tab

Next, select the Sensor Mounting tab (Figure 19) and enter the values for the lever arm distances and

mounting angles. Once these values are entered, select the OK button.

Note: These settings become active immediately. To save the settings to non-volatile memory, select

Settings, Save Settings. This permits the system to initialize using these installation parameters

whenever the PCS is powered-on.

Note: Any changes made to the IMU or the Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) lever arm

parameters will cause the fields to reset and begin again automatically.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-9

Figure 19: POSView Sensor Mounting Tab

Configuration - Automatic

Note: Perform a GNSS Azimuth Measurement Subsystem (GAMS) calibration prior to running this

procedure, see Antenna Installation Calibration on page 4-18.

Note: The integrated navigation solution should be delivering a RTK solution; may be tightly coupled or

using an auxiliary RTK GNSS receiver. The Nav Status (MV-POSView Status pane) indicates FLOAT

RTK or FIXED RTK.

Ensure that GAMS is on-line then select Settings, Installation, Installation Calibration Control from

the menu bar of the MV-POSView Controller program. The Calibration Control window is displayed

(Figure 20).

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-10

Figure 20: Calibration Control Screen

LEVER ARM CALIBRATION SELECT PANE

Note: The Figure of Merit (FOM) may not reach 100 if the vessel dynamics (speed and rate of

turn) are not great enough, the GNSS coverage is not good or the base corrections are not

reliably received.

Figure of Merit field - indicates the completeness of the correction level of the selected

parameter; the calibration (X, Y and Z) are complete when FOM reaches 100

X, Y, Z fields - computed values are complete when the Figure of Merit reaches 100 and the

field values stop changing; the field values may not correspond with the measured values

Reference to Primary GNSS check box - select to compute corrected values

Reference to Auxiliary 1 GNSS check box - not enabled

Reference to Auxiliary 2 GNSS check box - not enabled

Position Fix check box - not enabled

CALIBRATION ACTION PANE

Last Calibration Action field - indicates the last action performed

Stop Calibration button - select to stop the selected calibration action

Manual Calibration button - (only use for special situations) select to start the manual

calibration procedure; vessel must prescribe a loose figure eight pattern; the FOM reaches

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-11

100 and continues to update the X, Y, Z fields; next command would be Normal Transfer of

calibrated parameters

Auto Calibration button - (preferred) select to start the auto calibration procedure; vessel

must prescribe a loose figure eight pattern; once the corrections are complete they become

active, the Kalman filter is reset and POS restarts in the Navigate mode

No Action button - select to cancel all calibration actions

Normal Transfer button - select to make the Manual Calibration corrections active; the

Kalman filter is reset and POS restarts in the Navigate mode

Forced Transfer button - select to make the corrections active (FOM must be >0 and <100);

the Kalman filter is reset and POS restarts in the Navigate mode

COMMAND BUTTONS

OK button - enables all window parameter settings and closes the window, calibration does

not start

Close button - closes the window without saving or enabling any changes

Apply button - enables all window parameter settings, but does not close the window,

calibration does not start

Time Tags

POS attaches time tags to all of its outputs to permit synchronization with data from other sensors or

systems. The time tag is based on Universal Time Coordinated (UTC), GNSS, POS or User time; has a

resolution of 1 µs; and has an accuracy of less than 10 µs.

Select Settings, Installation, Tags & AutoStart on the MV-POSView Controller menu bar to display

(Figure 21) the settings.

Note: UTC and GPS Times are not identical. Due to the occasional need for the addition of a leap

second to UTC, there is an integer difference between UTC and GPS Time. Transitions between the

seconds are precisely coincident between the two times.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-12

Figure 21: Controller Tags, Multipath & AutoStart Tab

The User Time Data screen (Figure 22) on the controller shows the status of the user time

synchronization; select View, User Time Data. The user's equipment can send message 55 (see

POS MV V5 User Interface Control Document [Applanix document control number - PUBS-ICD-004089])

with their own time recovery time and POS will create an internal offset. Also, the user can then select the

User Time (Figure 21) to be output in the time ‘2’ field of ICD groups. This feature allows the user to

synchronize with a time base other than POS, GNSS or UTC. If more information is required, please

contact Applanix customer support, see page A-1 for contact details.

Figure 22: User Time Data Screen

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-13

AutoStart

AutoStart is a feature of POS MV that allows operation in a stand-alone configuration. With AutoStart

enabled, POS MV will transition to navigate mode after power-on, without operator intervention.

• With AutoStart enabled, POS MV will transition to navigate mode each time the PCS is powered-

on. In this configuration, the PCS can operate independently without the need for a controlling

PC.

• With AutoStart disabled, the system will remain in standby mode after power-on. The operator

must issue a command from the controlling PC, via the controller program, to make the system

transition to navigate mode.

To enable AutoStart, select Settings, Installation, Lever Arms & Mounting from the MV-POSView

menu bar, then select the Tags, Multipath and AutoStart tab and click the Enabled option button in the

AutoStart pane, see Figure 21. Select the OK button to accept the change.

Note: The AutoStart configuration change must be saved to NVM to retain its new setting when POS MV

is powered-on again; refer to the 4-17

description on page 4-16 for instructions.

Input/Output Ports Set-up

The Input/Output Ports Set-up screen shown in Figure 23 is accessed from the MV-POSView menu bar

by selecting Settings, Input/Output Ports. Configuration of each of the four serial COM ports is

performed on the screen tabs. The following lists the configuration choices:

• Selecting the input and output functionality for each port

• Setting the update rate for selected output data formats

• Setting the baud rate for the ports

• Setting the protocol and flow control for COM 1 and 2

• Selecting RS232 or RS422 interface for COM 3 and 4

COM Port Set-up

Select a tab for the COM port to be configured. All COM ports allow selection of Baud Rate. COM 1 and

2 allow selection of Parity, Data Bits, Stop Bits and Flow Control (Figure 23). COM 3 and 4 allow

selection of the physical Interface (Figure 24). Settings that are not available on a particular COM port

tab will be hidden or dim and not selectable.

Any input or output can be selected from the drop down menus for a given COM port (click on the down

arrow). A context sensitive pane will appear once an input or output selection has been made, as

described in the following sections.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-14

Figure 23: Input/Output Ports Set-up – COM1

Some interfaces require bi-directional communications, in which case a selection in either the Input or

Output menu will result in the automatic assignment of the corresponding Output or Input for that COM

port. For interfaces that require only uni-directional communications it is possible to assign an input and

an output simultaneously on a COM port, but a ‘Y’ cable is required to split the transmit (Tx) and receive

(Rx) lines to the two separate devices. A ‘Y’ cable is not included as part of the system.

Figure 24: Input/Output Ports Set-up – COM3

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-15

To accept the screen parameters, click the Apply button. To abort

any changes or to close the screen, click the Close button.

Heave Filter

Certain characteristics of the POS MV heave filter can be adjusted to obtain the best compromise

between steady-state heave error and the time that the filter takes to settle after abrupt changes in

vertical displacement; refer to Figure 25. You may have to modify the characteristics of the heave filter,

for example, to allow for the dynamic characteristics of different

vessels, variations of sea state or to meet the particular

requirements of a survey.

Optimum settings for the heave filter can depend upon a number of

factors, including the size and weight of the vessel, the weather

conditions in the survey area and the direction of travel into the sea.

Refer to the Theory of Operation description starting on page B-1

for a more detailed explanation of heave filter settings.

The default settings for the heave filter have proved to be satisfactory for use with a wide range of vessel

characteristics and across a broad spectrum of sea states:

• Heave bandwidth = 20.00 seconds. You can set the heave bandwidth to any positive number

greater than 1.0.

• Damping ratio = 0.707. You can set the damping ratio to any positive number less than 1.0.

Important

Although you cannot harm any part of the POS MV by changing the

heave filter characteristics, inappropriate values for heave bandwidth

and damping factor can severely degrade the measurement

performance.

Do not alter the characteristics of the heave filter unless you are

entirely confident that your changes will improve the performance of

the system for a given set of survey conditions.

Note: Save the settings to NVM so that they are effective next time POS MV is powered-up. Refer to the

Save Settings topic on page 4-17 for instructions. Settings become active once the OK or the Apply

button is pressed.

To modify the characteristics of the heave filter select Settings, Heave from the menu bar of the MV-

POSView Controller program. Enter appropriate values into the Heave Bandwidth and Damping Ratio

fields of the Heave Filter pane. Select the OK button to activate the settings and close the dialogue box.

Figure 25: POSView Heave Filter

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-16

Refer to the Reference to Centre of Rotation instructions on page 2-28 for an explanation of the method

that POS MV uses to measure and filter heave values.

The Z Altitude option allows the user to replace the heave filter with an inertial smoothed RTK height in

the chosen output string.

GNSS 1/2 Interface

The PCS provides a mechanism to connect directly to the internal GNSS receivers’ COM ports through

the external COM 3 and COM 4 ports. This is a bi-directional RS232 link so both input and output are

automatically assigned when either one is selected. GNSS 1 is accessible through COM 3 (Figure 26)

and GNSS 2 is accessible through COM 4 (Figure 27).

The purpose of this link is to allow field upgrades of the GNSS receiver firmware if necessary. This

connection could also be used to output data directly from the GNSS if configured to do so.

Applying a configuration to the internal GNSS via the COM port must be done with extreme care so as

not to interfere with the PCS configuration. Contact Applanix customer support for assistance.

Figure 26: Input/Output Ports Set-up – GNSS 1 Interface

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-17

Figure 27: Input/Output Ports Set-up – GNSS 2 Interface

Save Settings

Changes made to the POS MV parameters will have an immediate effect on system operation. However,

if you require the changes to apply to all future occasions when you power-on the POS MV, you must

save them to NVM.

The non-volatile memory is resident in the PCS so that all stored operating parameters will be available to

the system during the start-up sequence, even when it operates in a stand-alone configuration.

To save the system parameters to NVM, select Settings, Save Settings from the MV-POSView menu

bar.

Note: If you do not save any new settings for the installation parameters to NVM, POS MV will apply the

values stored previously (or the factory default values) when you next power-on the system.

Initial GNSS Configuration

Applanix supplies POS MV with two GNSS receiver cards installed in the PCS and optimally configured

for use with the system.

If either of the GNSS receivers loses its configuration for any reason, the PCS will reconfigure the

receiver cards automatically for its own use. The messages supplied by the GNSS receivers are only

those required by POS MV.

If you ever need to configure the installed GNSS receivers manually, you must select Tools, Configure

GNSS from the menu bar window of the MV-POSView Controller program.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-18

Antenna Installation Calibration

A successful antenna installation calibration depends upon the GNSS Azimuth Measurement Subsystem

(GAMS) being able to use data from five or more satellites with a Positional Dilution of Precision (PDOP)

equal to or less than three. Perform the antenna installation calibration at a time when there is good

satellite geometry.

Note: Applanix recommends that the user make use of the GNSS mission planning software to identify

an optimal time of day during which the PDOP is at a minimum in order to achieve a good GAMS

calibration.

Perform the following steps with the vessel under way in an area where unrestricted manoeuvring is

possible. You have the option of allowing POS MV to start the calibration automatically (this is called a

calibration auto-start) or to start the calibration manually.

1. Ensure that MV-POSView is Connected as indicated in the status bar, refer to

2. Figure 35 on page 5-3.

3. Select View, GAMS Solution from the menu bar to open POS MV GAMS Solution window

shown in Figure 28.

Figure 28: GAMS Solution Status

4. Transition the system to standby mode by selecting the Standby icon from the MV-POSView tool

bar.

5. Select Settings, Installation, GAMS Parameter Setup from the menu bar to open the GAMS

Parameter Setup window shown in Figure 29.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-19

6. In the GAMS Parameter Setup window, enter a value in the Heading Calibration Threshold

field that represents the best achievable with the vessel, ideally 0.5° or less. Select the OK

button.

When the indicated Heading Accuracy (Attitude pane on the controller main window) falls

below the setting in the Heading Calibration Threshold field and the GAMS status (main

window Status pane) reads Ready Offline, POS MV will start the antenna installation calibration

routine. Choose an easy value for POS MV to achieve as you perform a series of calibration

manoeuvres with the vessel:

• Set a lower value (approximately 0.2°) if you can manoeuvre the vessel aggressively.

• Conversely, set a higher value (approximately 1°) if the most aggressive manoeuvres you

can perform are 180° turns followed by a straight run.

Figure 29: POSView GAMS Parameters Setup

7. Perform the following in the GAMS Parameter Setup window:

a) In most cases, this value is entered as ‘0’. Only if you are able to measure the antenna

separation to 1 mm accuracy should you enter a value here.

Refer to the Installation Checklist on page 2-32 for instructions on how to measure the

antenna separation distance.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-20

Figure 30: POSView GAMS Installation Wizard

b) In each of the component fields in the Baseline Vector pane, enter ‘0’. Select the Apply and

OK buttons.

8. Manually transition POS MV to the navigate mode. This also commands GAMS to begin

execution of its on-the-fly (OTF) ambiguity resolution algorithm.

9. Next, perform either the auto-start calibration (steps 10 and 11)or the manual calibration

procedure (steps 12 and 13).

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-21

AUTO-START CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

10. Select Settings, GAMS Calibration Control, Start from the MV-POSView menu bar (Figure 31,

page 4-22). The Status pane for GAMS indicates CAL Requested (Figure 31, page 4-22).

The Start command prepares the system for an automatic start to the calibration process, but

does not actually start it. Instead, the calibration process will start automatically when the POS

MV RMS heading error falls below the value that you set for the Heading Calibration Threshold

field in step 6 above.

11. If possible, when GAMS has resolved the carrier phase ambiguities (GAMS on the main window

Status pane reads Ready Offline), perform a series of full turns, ‘S-turns’ or ‘Figure-8’

manoeuvres, each lasting approximately one minute.

During these manoeuvres, monitor the POS MV Heading Accuracy field on the MV-POSView

main window Attitude pane (Figure 31, page 4-22). When the value displayed falls below the

setting for the Heading Calibration Threshold field (Figure 29), finish the turns and manoeuvres

and hold the vessel steady on a course and at a fixed speed.

The Status pane for GAMS now indicates CAL in Progress and this condition lasts for

approximately 60 seconds. When POS MV has completed the calibration, the displayed GAMS

status becomes CAL Completed. This condition lasts for approximately five seconds and then

changes to Online.

See Options starting with step 14.

MANUAL CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

Note: Before proceeding ensure the GAMS Parameters Setup window displays the values that you

entered in step 6 above.

12. When GAMS has resolved the carrier phase ambiguities, the Status pane for GAMS indicates

Ready Offline (Figure 31, page 4-22). You can start the calibration manually at any time.

If possible, perform a series of full turns, ‘S-turns’ or ‘Figure-8’ manoeuvres, each lasting

approximately one minute. During these manoeuvres, monitor the POS MV Heading Accuracy

on the MV-POSView main window Attitude pane (Figure 31, page 4-22). Ideally, the heading

accuracy displayed should be as small as possible.

Wait until the heading error becomes as small as possible before starting the calibration. Simple

manoeuvres of the vessel, such as a change of course, will cause the heading accuracy to

improve.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-22

13. To start the manual calibration, select Settings, GAMS Calibration Control, Force from the MV-

POSView menu bar (Figure 31, page 4-22). This commands an immediate start of the calibration

process.

The Status pane for GAMS indicates CAL in Progress and this condition lasts for approximately

60 seconds. When POS MV has completed the calibration, the displayed GAMS status becomes

CAL Completed. This condition lasts for approximately five seconds and then changes to

Online.

See Options starting with step 14.

OPTIONS

14. Suspend calibration while in progress: Select Settings, GAMS Calibration Control, Suspend.

The displayed GAMS status then becomes CAL Suspended.

The system suspends the partially completed calibration process until you resume it. To resume

the calibration process select Settings, GAMS Calibration Control, Start.

Figure 31: POSView Settings Menu, Status and Attitude Panes

15. Stop calibration while in progress: Select Settings, GAMS Calibration Control, Stop. The

displayed GAMS status then becomes Ready Offline. The system cancels the partially

completed calibration process.

16. Save calibration data: Select Settings, Save Settings. Wait until the MV-POSView Controller

program displays the Settings Saved message panel. Select the OK button to close the message

panel.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-23

17. Monitor system operation: Indications of a successful calibration appear in the main window of

the MV-POSView Controller program:

• The Status pane for GAMS indicates Online.

• The Altitude pane Heading Accuracy field drops slowly to less than 0.15° and

eventually settles to a value of 0.03° in a low multipath environment. The actual value

that it settles to depends on the current setting for the multipath environment.

If the calibration was successful and no GNSS dropouts occurred, POS MV should settle into a

steady-state operation using the GAMS heading aiding, as indicated by the Online status.

If the calibration was not successful, GAMS will reject the carrier phase ambiguities repeatedly

and will eventually reject the installation parameters. If this occurs, repeat the calibration process.

18. Record data: If the installation parameters appear to be correct, select Settings, Installation,

GAMS Parameter Setup from the menu bar (Figure 29, page 4-19) and write down the displayed

parameters. Keep the written record in a safe place for future reference.

Refer to the Operation with GAMS topic on page 1-8 for a description of how GAMS uses the GAMS

installation parameters to aid the On-the-Fly (OTF) ambiguity search.

Installation Parameter Correction

The surveyed antenna baseline vector may include the following errors:

• The length of the vector may not be correct if there were large multipath errors during the

calibration process. This may affect the reliability of the GAMS ambiguity resolution during future

POS MV Initialization sequences.

• There may be an azimuth error similar in size to the displayed heading accuracy that existed

during the calibration process. This results in a constant offset in the displayed heading during

normal operation of the POS MV with GAMS heading aiding.

Correct these errors by:

1. If the displayed antenna separation differs by more than 5 mm (~¼ in) from the value that you

measured after you installed the antennas, clear the installation parameters and then re-enter the

measured separation distance in the GAMS Parameter Setup window, see Figure 29 on page 4-

19. Select the OK button to install the new antenna separation distance.

Begin a new calibration procedure, see Antenna Installation Calibration on page 4-18.

The 5 mm (~¼ in) allowance accounts for differences that may exist between the antenna phase

centres and their geometric centres.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-24

2. If you can identify a heading offset then enter this value in the Heading Correction field of the

GAMS Parameter Setup window, see Figure 29 on page 4-19. Select the OK button to install the

new correction value.

POS MV will then compute new components of the surveyed antenna baseline vector having a

corrected azimuth.

3. Select Settings, Save Settings from the MV-POSView menu bar to save the new values to the

PCS Non-Volatile Memory (NVM).

Note: The Heading Correction field in the GAMS Parameter Setup window allows you to correct an

inaccurately surveyed baseline vector. You can use this method to obtain a more accurate vector.

Note: You should not use this facility to implement the installation angles of the IMU body frame with

respect to the echo-sonar frame. Refer to the Installation Parameters and the Configuration Data

descriptions on pages 2-24 and 4-7 respectively, for instructions on how to measure and enter these

installation parameters.

Power-Off

The initial power-off sequence for the POS MV system occurs in three stages:

a) Save parameter and configuration changes

b) Exit the MV-POSView Controller program and power-off the controlling PC

c) Power-off the POS MV system

Save Changes

Powering-off the PCS before the MV-POSView displays the

confirmation message panel may corrupt the settings held in

NVM.

Whenever changes are made to the POS MV installation parameters or its configuration, they must be

saved to NVM in order to retain them for the next power-on sequence.

The MV-POSView Controller program displays a message panel to confirm that it has saved the settings

successfully to NVM. Wait for this message to appear prior to powering-off the PCS or the POS MV

system.

Save Parameter Values

Select Settings, Save Settings from the MV-POSView menu bar to save all parameter settings to NVM.

Refer to the Save Settings description on page 4-26 for more information.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-25

Perform the following to check that the PCS has stored the parameters correctly:

1. Select File, Exit (or press Alt, F4) to close the MV-POSView Controller program.

2. Press and hold the POWER switch on the PCS front panel until the POWER light starts flashing.

3. Wait thirty seconds and then press and hold the POWER switch to power-on the PCS and

illuminate the POWER light.

4. Start the MV-POSView Controller program.

5. Select Settings, GAMS Calibration Control and check that the PCS has saved all the GAMS

installation parameters correctly. Select the Cancel button.

Save Configuration

Select File, Save POS Config from the MV-POSView menu bar to save the new configuration settings to

the PC. Refer to the Manage Multiple Configurations description on page 4-27 for more information.

POS MV Power-Off

POS MV V5 PCS

Power for the POS MV V5 system is applied to the PCS rear panel PWR connector, refer to Figure 32.

Two power switches are available on the PCS; a rear panel PWR switch and a front panel POWER

switch. Refer to the POS MV Power-On description on page 4-1 for more information.

Figure 32: PCS Front and Rear Panels - POS MV V5

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-26

POS MV V5-1 PCS

Power for the POS MV V5-1 system is applied to the PCS rear panel PWR connector, refer to Figure 7.

The front panel POWER switch (Figure 33) is an alternate action push-and-hold switch; press once for

power-on, press again for power-off.

Figure 33: PCS Front Panel – POS MV V5-1

Both Systems (POS MV V5 and POS MV V5-1)

To power-off the POS MV system, perform the following steps:

1. Select File, Exit from MV-POSView menu bar to close MV-POSView Controller program.

2. Press and hold the PCS front panel POWER switch until front panel POWER light starts flashing.

3. Set PCS rear panel PWR switch to off (POS MV V5).

Leave the POS MV powered-on to reduce the electrical and

thermal stresses that occur when the system is powered-off and

powered-on.

Save Settings

Cycling power while saving may result in lost settings.

Save the POS MV parameters after any modification, otherwise changes will be lost when the POS MV

power is cycled (powered-down and up). Each time POS MV is powered up, the settings default to the

last saved values. To save these settings, select Settings, Save Settings from the MV-POSView

Controller menu bar. The MV-POSView Controller indicates when the settings are successfully saved

(may take up to 30 seconds to save the settings).

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-27

Making Changes

If you need to change any of the POS MV operating parameters, you must use the MV-POSView

Controller program as described throughout this section of the manual.

Any changes that you make will take effect immediately, although you must save them to NVM if you

require the changes to apply each time you power-on the system.

Note: To make any parameter changes permanent you must save them to NVM. Do this by selecting

Settings, Save Settings from the main window of the controller program.

Manage Multiple Configurations

The controlling PC’s hard drive may be used to store multiple configurations. Select File, Save POS

Config on the controller menu bar, specify a file name and save location, then click the OK button.

Repeat this for each configuration.

To load a particular POS MV configuration from the PC’s hard disk, choose File, Load POS Config,

highlight the file to load and click the OK button. POS MV is automatically configured with the settings

contained in the configuration file.

Note: By default, POS MV boots to the last saved configuration located in the PCS NVM.

Note: Occasionally a change is made in the Ethernet interface that affects the format of configuration

data. The effects of the change are described in the release notes accompanying the firmware upgrade or

contact an Applanix Customer Support representative for additional information; refer to page A-1 for

contact details.

Password Protection

The password protection feature protects the controller’s critical settings from unauthorized personnel. An

authorized user must login from the MV-POSView Controller program when attempting to change settings

in the following menu selected windows:

• File, Load POS Config menu selection

• Settings, Heave menu selection - Heave Filter window

• Settings, Installation menu selection - Lever Arms & Mounting Angles, Sensor Mounting and

Tags, Multipath & AutoStart windows

• Settings, Installation, GAMS Parameter Setup menu selection - GAMS Parameter Setup window

• Settings, Installation, User Accuracy menu selection - User Parameter Accuracy window

• Settings, Installation, POS IP Address menu selection - POS Internet Address window

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-28

• Settings, Save Settings menu selection

Each of the above windows has an icon in the lower left corner. They are either all locked

(password protected) or all unlocked (not protected or the user has logged in).

Note: The password protection feature can be disabled using the POS Config utility.

The following outlines the password protection operation:

• Default password is pcsPasswd

• User is prompted to log in when one of the above windows are selected (a change is made and

the OK button is selected), see Figure 34 left

• User is logged in until one of the following occurs:

o A period of 10 minutes elapses

o User disconnects via the MV-POSView Controller monitor

icon (disconnect) located on the tool bar

o User terminates the TCP connection

• Change the password by selecting Settings, Installation, Set Password, see Figure 34 right

side

• Reset the password to the default setting (pcsPasswd) by:

o Acquire an authorization code, from Applanix Customer Support, for Option 10 of the POS

Config utility (contained on the installation CD); refer to page A-1 for details

o Start the POS Config utility and select the left box (10 DPW Disable Password Protection)

o Reset POS MV

o Start the POS Config utility again, select the POS chassis IP address (appears

automatically), then de-select Option 10

o Reset POS MV again, the password protection is enabled and the password is reset to its

default value (pcsPasswd)

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Configuration

4-29

Figure 34: POSView Controller Password Protection

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-1

5.0 System Operation

This section describes how to use the MV-POSView Controller program to operate the POS MV. To

perform the instructions in this section:

• The Position and Orientation System for Marine Vessels (POS MV) controller program (MV-

POSView) must be installed on the controlling Personal Computer (PC).

• The controlling PC and the POS Computer System (PCS) must both be connected to the same

Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN).

• The controlling PC and the PCS must both have network compatible Internet Protocol (IP)

addresses and subnet masks.

• The POS MV must be configured with the correct installation parameters, which are saved to

Non-Volatile Memory (NVM).

POS MV may be configured to transition directly to navigate mode after power-on and deliver integrated

navigation solutions through the enabled ports. This is performed by enabling AutoStart, refer to page 4-

13 for instructions.

If necessary, refer to the following instructions for assistance:

• Installation starting on page 2-1.

• System Configuration starting on page 4-1

• Power-On starting on page 4-1

• PCS IP Address starting on page 4-4

• AutoStart starting on page 4-13

• Power-Off starting on page 4-24

• Password Protection starting on page 4-27

• Software Installation starting on page D-1

MV-POSView Controller Program

Modes of Operation

The controller program operates in one of two modes:

• Monitor mode - the controller program displays all the PCS data broadcast over the Ethernet

display port but cannot change any of the PCS settings. This mode allows several users to

monitor the PCS data simultaneously.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-2

• Control mode - the controller program displays all the PCS data broadcast over the Ethernet

display port and has an established Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) connection to the PCS

control port. This allows you to change the system configuration and save any new configurations

to NVM. Only one MV-POSView Controller program can connect to a given PCS at any one time.

In control mode, when a controller window is opened, the controller automatically requests the

appropriate group(s) to be output from the display port.

PCS Ethernet Connection

Refer to

Figure 35 on page 5-3 for this discussion. The MV-POSView Controller constantly receives broadcast

display data and records the originating PCS IP address. This list of IP addresses is displayed in the tool

bar drop-down field. The user selects the IP address for the PCS of interest from the drop-down field. The

controller monitors or connects to the IP address displayed on the controller tool bar.

Monitoring POS MV

Main Window Regions

Figure 35 shows the main window of the MV-POSView Controller. The window can be divided into five

regions:

Title bar (top):

Identifies the controller type; in this case MV-POSView.

Menu bar (top):

Select any of these items to display its pull-down menu

tree.

Tool bar (top):

Contains icons or action buttons (hot buttons) of

frequently used functions; the IP address of the Ethernet

connection is displayed.

POS MV status

(centre):

Contains sensor and processing data; cannot be

changed.

Status bar

(bottom):

This shows from left to right:

• Current date in mm/dd/yyyy format

• Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) or Global

Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) time in

hh:mm:ss format (user selectable)

• POS MV time in hh:mm:ss format since the POS MV

was powered-on (not the time since the controller

program was started)

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-3

• Connection status of the MV-POSView Controller

program:

Connected - the controller is communicating with the

specified IP address in control mode

Disconnecting - the controller is terminating

communication with the specified IP address

Connecting - the controller is attempting to connect to

the control port of the specified IP address

Monitor - the controller is receiving broadcast data

from the specified IP address

Waiting - the controller cannot communicate with the

specified IP address

Figure 35: POSView Controller Main Window

POS MV Status Region

POS MV status is displayed in the centre area of the MV-POSView Controller window. The following

describes these areas.

Status Pane

Displays the status of POS MV.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-4

POS Mode - POS MV may be in standby mode or in one of its

navigation modes.

Levelling Active

Basic levelling and heading determination; no

navigation output

Nav: Degraded

Navigation active but with loose error model

Nav: Aligned

Navigation with full error model correction

Nav: Full

All user specified accuracies are met

The normal operating condition for POS MV is navigate mode.

IMU Status - this field may display OK, Warning or Failure.

If the Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU) status field shows anything except OK, check the

Fault Detection window described in Faults and Messages on page 5-8. Contact Applanix

for advice if necessary.

Nav Status - displays the source and quality of the GNSS sensors

and the resulting mode of the navigation solution.

DR (Dead

Reckoning )

No GNSS input is available; navigation is using

only the IMU data

RTCM DGNSS

Navigator is tightly coupled using the primary

GNSS raw observables plus base GNSS

corrections (RTCM 1 or 9)

CODE DGNSS

Navigator is tightly coupled using the primary

GNSS raw observables plus base GNSS

corrections (RTCM 18 and 19, CMR, CMR+)

FLOAT RTK

Navigator is tightly coupled using the primary

GNSS raw observables plus base GNSS

corrections (RTCM 18 and 19, CMR, CMR+)

FIXED RTK

Same as Float RTK but better accuracy

Pri. C/A

Navigator is loosely coupled using the primary

GNSS position data in C/A mode

Pri. DGNSS

Navigator is loosely coupled using the primary

GNSS position data in DGNSS mode

Pri. P Code

Navigator is loosely coupled using the primary

GNSS position data in P-CODE mode

Pri. RTK

Navigator is loosely coupled using the primary

GNSS position data in RTK mode

Aux. DGNSS

Navigator is loosely coupled using the auxiliary

GNSS position data in DGNSS mode

Aux. P Code

Navigator is loosely coupled using the auxiliary

GNSS position data in P-CODE mode

Aux. Float RTK

Navigator is loosely coupled using the auxiliary

GNSS position data in Float RTK mode

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-5

Aux. WL RTK

Navigator is loosely coupled using the auxiliary

GNSS position data in Wide Lane RTK mode

Aux. NL RTK

Navigator is loosely coupled using the auxiliary

GNSS position data in Narrow Lane RTK mode

GAMS - this field can display Online, Ready Online, Ready Offline, Cal in Progress, Cal

Requested, Cal Complete or Not Ready.

Note: Measurement of attitude, position, velocity and dynamics described below are valid for the

vessel location as determined by the Reference to vessel lever arm distances. Accuracy indications

are described in the Accuracy Pane heading on page 5-5.

Attitude Pane

Displays angles of roll, pitch and heading using degrees in the vessel frame of reference.

Position Pane

Displays latitude and longitude solutions in degrees from the equator and the Prime Meridian

respectively, and WGS84 ellipsoid altitude solutions in metres.

Velocity Pane

Displays velocities in their longitudinal, lateral and downward components in metres per second.

Dynamics Pane

Displays vessel dynamics (angular rates in degrees per second, and accelerations in m/s2) in their

longitudinal, lateral and downward components.

Accuracy Pane

There are five coloured lights, one adjacent to the Attitude, Heading, Position, Velocity and real-

time Heave labels. The lights show whether the associated measurement is within a user-defined

accuracy threshold (green) or outside it (red).

These lights provide a visual indication of an acceptable user defined performance level. The

threshold settings do not affect POS MV performance.

Note: POS MV will not transition to full navigation mode until it has met all of the user-defined

accuracy requirements and the entire Accuracy pane indicators show green.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-6

ATTITUDE, HEADING, POSITION AND VELOCITY PARAMETERS

To set the thresholds for each measurement, select Settings, Installation, User Accuracy from the

MV-POSView menu bar. Enter the preferred accuracy threshold for each of the four fields; see

Figure 36. Click the OK button to accept.

The threshold settings do not affect the operation of POS MV, however, POS MV will not transition to

full navigation mode until it achieves the RMS accuracy setting boundaries.

Figure 36: POSView User Parameter Accuracy

In addition, POS MV estimates the accuracy of the data contained in the Attitude, Position and

Velocity panes. These estimations reflect the confidence boundaries on the displayed parameters;

they vary according to the current performance level of the GNSS receiver, the number of satellites

tracked and whether DGNSS corrections are available to the navigation algorithm. It also depends on

the level of motion that POS MV is experiencing; more dynamics will tend to improve the accuracy of

the solution (reducing the displayed confidence boundaries).

HEAVE PARAMETER

The real-time heave accuracy parameter is not adjustable by the user. The fixed setting is based on

the industry standard performance ratings of 5 cm or 5% (whichever is greater). For heave

amplitudes (peak-to-peak) of 1 m or less, a 5 cm threshold is used, while for heave amplitudes which

exceed 1 m, 5% of the peak-to-peak amplitude is used.

Events Pane

Displays the identification count number and the time of occurrence for the most recent recorded

events.

Speed Pane

Displays the current speed in nautical miles per hour (knots) and the direction of the velocity vector

(Track) in degrees. When the vessel is travelling in the forward direction, the direction should be

similar to the Heading displayed in the Attitude pane.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-7

Sensor Navigation Data

The Navigation Data at Sensors window, shown in Figure 37, displays the navigation data for sensor 1

and sensor 2. Access this window selecting View, Sensor Navigation; a tab is available for each sensor.

Sensor 1 and sensor 2 may be used to define the location of a multibeam transducer or other equipment.

Refer to the Installation Parameters description starting on page 2-24 when assigning lever arms and

mounting angles.

Position Pane

The sensor position appears as latitude and longitude in degrees, minutes and seconds. The altitude

of the sensor position is shown in metres above the WGS84 ellipsoid. POS MV defines latitude,

longitude and altitude with respect to the World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS-84) referenced

ellipsoid.

Latitude is reference to the equator and is either North or South. Longitude is reference to the Prime

Meridian and is either East or West. Estimations of accuracy are in metres.

Figure 37: POSView Navigation Data at Sensors

Attitude Pane

Displays the angles of roll, pitch and heading of the sensor using the sensor frame of reference. POS

MV uses degrees to display the attitude measurements and their estimated boundaries of accuracy.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-8

Velocity Pane

Velocities of the sensor are given in the longitudinal and down directions. POS MV uses metres per

second to display the velocities and their estimated boundaries of accuracy.

Dynamics Pane

Displays the angular rates and linear accelerations of the sensor in the longitudinal and vertical

directions. POS MV uses degrees per second or m/s2 to display the dynamics and their estimated

boundaries of accuracy.

Wander Angle Field

The navigation frame is derived from the North, East and Down (NED) frame by a rotation of “



”

(wander angle) about the down axis. This provides a locally level coordinate frame that is well-defined

at the earth’s poles.

Heave Field

Heave is the filtered vertical motion (acceleration data) plus roll and pitch derived heave at the sensor

location. Heave is in a positive down direction in a ‘local level’ or ‘platform’ frame, so the heave is in

the gravity direction.

Faults and Messages

The Fault Detection window displays the status of POS MV system and reports any fault conditions that

may occur during operation, see Figure 38. Two other tabs on the window show IMU and GNSS

Correction fault status. Three light conditions may occur where; green indicates an acceptable condition,

red indicates an unacceptable condition and greyed is not applicable. Access to the Fault Detection

window is from the MV-POSView menu bar, select View, Faults.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-9

Figure 38: POSView Fault Detection

Note: Some fields may display a red indicator (intermittently) during initialization and operation.

The Fault Identification description starting on page 9-1 includes a list of the messages that may appear

in the message log. If you suspect that a fault condition has occurred, but the Faults Detection window

does not show it, check the message log. To access the Message Log (Figure 39) select View, Message

Log from the MV-POSView menu bar.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-10

Figure 39: POSView Message Log

POS MV uses AutoRecovery and Fault Detection, Isolation and Reconfiguration (FDIR) to assist in its

recovery from fault conditions. AutoRecovery helps POS MV to recover from a communications failure

between the PCS and the IMU, and provides alerts for any problems in this area. Investigate persistent

communication failures with the IMU, the most likely cause being a faulty data cable or connector. Never

open the IMU; if you suspect the IMU is faulty, contact Applanix for return instructions. Refer to Technical

Support and Service on page A-1 for procedures.

POS MV monitors its sensing subsystems continuously and determines which of them, if any, shows

degraded performance. FDIR allows POS MV to combine data from the GNSS and IMU to offer the best

navigation solution for the current data quality.

For more information on AutoRecovery and FDIR refer to page 1-10.

Data Logging

POS MV real-time and raw data may be recorded on storage media for post-processing. Typically, the

data are recorded on removable media, a USB flash drive using the USB connector installed in the front

of the POS Computer System (PCS). Alternately, the data may be transferred across the Ethernet Data

Port to a disk file on an external PC. The USB flash drive is useable for post-processing in any PC with a

USB connector.

Back-up logging is initiated when data are logged to the removable media and remains active, regardless

of the removable media data logging activity, until the PCS is reset or powered-off.

Note: Use of the removable media interface is preferred due to the bandwidth limitations associated with

some Ethernet installations.

The PCS contains a USB connector and an internal memory device, both dedicated to data logging. The

system includes a 4GB industrial grade USB flash drive which is inserted into a USB connector behind a

door on the front of the PCS; see Figure 42, page 5-12 for MV V5 and Figure 43, page 5-13 for MV V5-1.

A 4 GB internal memory device functions as a circular buffer and is used to back-up the last data logging

file. Back-up logging is automatic and does not require any user maintenance. Once the user begins

removable media logging, back-up logging will log the same data and continues to back-up the data until

the system is reset or powered-off.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-11

To access the logging configuration and control menus, select one of the following from the MV-POSView

menu: Logging, Ethernet Logging... or Logging, USB Logging....

The logging screens (Figures 40 and 41) permit the selection of data groups to be recorded and define

the logging rate for those data groups.

The Ethernet logging port is intended for data logging for a delayed processing application where data

loss cannot be tolerated. This port implements a very large storage buffer to minimize the risk of data

loss.

The logging method, Ethernet or Removable media, is changeable at any time, even if logging is in

progress. To accept the screen parameters and not close the screen, click the Apply button. To accept

the screen parameters and close the screen, click the OK button.

Figure 40: Ethernet Logging Control

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-12

Figure 41: USB Logging Control

Note: If the logged data are to be used with POSPac, click the POSPac button to select all the groups

required for post-processing.

Data Logging – Removable Media

Insert a USB flash drive

The USB flash drive can be inserted into the PCS at any time (i.e. with PCS power on or off). Both V5 and

V5-1 versions have the removable USB connector behind a door on the front of the PCS but the internal

mechanism is different.

MV V5

Open the spring loaded USB access door on the front of the PCS all the way and it will stay open on its

own. Insert the USB flash drive into the bay (Figure 43) ensuring that the card is facing up, Applanix logo

showing. The logging bay door should close without hitting the USB flash drive if it is properly seated in

the connector.

Figure 42: Removable Media Bay – POS MV V5

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-13

MV V5-1

The USB connector is attached to a moving shuttle that allows the USB flash drive to be entirely enclosed

by the PCS housing. Insert the USB flash drive into the bay (Figure 43) ensuring that the card is facing

up, Applanix logo showing. The shuttle mechanism will move back to its innermost position, at which point

the USB flash drive must be pressed into the connector. The logging bay door should close without hitting

the USB flash drive if it is properly seated in the connector.

Figure 43: Removable Media Bay – POS MV V5-1

Start Logging – Removable Media

AutoLog

If AutoLog is enabled (refer to Figure 41 on page 5-12), logging starts automatically on PCS power-up. If

AutoLog is enabled and there is no USB flash drive in the logging bay, the Logging light will turn red. If

this occurs, insert a USB flash drive and start manually as described in the following paragraphs.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-14

Manual Start

Press the Logging button on the PCS front panel and hold for at least 2 seconds to begin.

An alternate method to start logging is to click the MV-POSView Start Logging button on the PC Card

Logging Control screen (Figure 41, page 5-12).

For a description of the logging status lights, refer to Table 34.

Stop Logging – Removable Media

Logging is stopped manually by pressing the Logging button on the PCS front panel and holding for at

least 2 seconds. Logging stops after about six seconds.

An alternate method to stop logging is to click the MV-POSView Stop Logging button on the PC Card

Logging Control (Figure 41, page 5-12) screen.

Logging data to the removable media may be stopped and restarted repeatedly. Restarting the logging

process causes a new file to be opened with the same kernel name. If a new kernel name is assigned,

the new file is viewed as a new mission.

Note: A data gap is treated as a new mission. The system can tolerate a 0.015 ms (maximum) IMU data

gap.

Logged Data

Data are logged to the removable media in approximately 12-Megabyte (MB) files. If POS MV loses

power while logging data to the USB flash drive, the amount of mission time lost will depend on how

many groups were selected for output. The fewer the groups the less information recorded per minute, a

longer time to fill a 12 MB file and the more mission time that may be lost.

Remove the USB flash drive

Do not remove a USB flash drive from the logging bay when the

logging light is on; the PCS may still be writing to the device. If

the USB flash drive is removed when the logging light is on,

there is a chance that all mission data will be lost.

Stop logging before attempting to remove the USB flash drive from the logging bay.

Note: It may take several seconds after a request to stop logging for the PCS to stop recording to the

USB flash drive and the logging light to extinguish.

MV V5

When the logging light is off, open the logging bay door, grasp the USB flash drive and remove it from

the connector (Figure 42, page 5-12).

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-15

MV V5-1

When the logging light is off, open the logging bay door, press in on the USB flash drive and then release.

The shuttle mechanism will partly eject the USB flash drive to a point where it is possible to remove it

from the connector (Figure 43, page 5-13).

Data Logging - Ethernet

Ethernet logging is intended to capture data for a delayed processing application where data loss cannot

be tolerated. Data are output for Ethernet logging on the LAN data logging port. This port implements a

very large storage buffer to minimize the risk of data loss due to delays in the Ethernet link.

Ethernet logging is performed using the MV-POSView software or other user supplied software. Any

custom designed logging software’s interface must conform to the POS MV Ethernet ICD specifications.

Please refer to Applanix document PUBS-ICD-004089 for a description of the Ethernet data output

format.

Note the following points regarding the Ethernet circuit:

• Requires at least a 100 Base T connection.

• Applanix recommends the use of the shielded Ethernet cables shipped with the POS MV system.

• Use of shielded Ethernet cables is a requirement of the European Union CE standard.

Note: Ethernet data logging cannot be started or stopped using the Logging button on the PCS front

panel.

Ethernet data logging performed by MV-POSView will be written to a single file and could be

subject to loss or corruption depending on the stability of the PC on which it is being recorded.

Start logging - Ethernet Data Port

To start Ethernet data logging to a local PC, select Logging on the MV-POSView menu bar and

Ethernet Logging on the drop-down menu. Next, select a file location and name using the Browse

button, and finally, click the Start Logging button; refer to Figure 40 on page 5-11.

Stop logging - Ethernet Data Port

To stop Ethernet data logging, click the Stop Logging button on the Ethernet Logging Control screen

(Figure 40, page 5-11).

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-16

Data Output – Ethernet

The Ethernet real-time data output port is intended for real-time control applications where the most

current position and orientation data are required. Real time data output on an Ethernet port is intended to

provide data for a third-party application that is capable of decoding the POS MV Ethernet ICD format.

Please refer to Applanix document PUBS-ICD-004089 for a description of the Ethernet data output

format. These ports implement small storage buffers which are flushed frequently to ensure timely

delivery of the data.

Ethernet Real-Time is used for real-time control applications,

whereas, Ethernet Logging has a large data buffer.

Start Output - Ethernet Realtime Data Port

To start Ethernet real-time data output, select Settings on the MV-POSView menu bar and Ethernet

Real-time Port on the drop-down menu. The window shown in Figure 44 appears.

Click on the tab for the port to be configured and then select the group or groups to be output by clicking

on the check box next to the group in the Logging Group Select pane. Select an output rate for group 1

(navigation solution) and finally, click the Start Logging button.

Figure 44: Ethernet Realtime Output Control.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-17

Operation with GAMS

Normal Operation

If POS MV has valid installation parameters stored in NVM then it is ready to operate with GAMS heading

aiding.

a) Follow the instructions in the Power-On topic on page 4-1 to power-on the PCS.

b) If you have not enabled AutoStart, transition POS MV to the navigate mode by selecting the Nav

icon on the MV-POSView tool bar.

View both the GAMS Solution and the Status pane windows (Figure 45) to follow the GAMS Initialization

sequence.

1. Once the POS MV has completed its levelling routine GAMS will start-up. The controller program

will show the following indicators:

• The Status pane will show GAMS as Not Ready. This indicates that GAMS has not

resolved the carrier phase ambiguities.

• The GAMS Solution window shows SVs in solution, A priori PDOP and Antenna

Separation.

• In addition, the GAMS Solution window shows a list of satellites (SVs or space vehicles)

that are being tracked by POS MV. The order in which they appear in the window is not

important.

2. If POS MV is tracking fewer than five satellites, or if the indicated Position Dilution of Precision

(PDOP) is greater than 4.5, then GAMS becomes dormant. In this dormant state, GAMS

continues to monitor tracked satellites but does not process the observables from the GNSS

receivers. GAMS status displays Not Ready.

Figure 45: POSView GAMS Solution and Status Pane

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-18

3. Following the successful completion of coarse levelling, the POS Mode transitions to Degraded

Navigation status. During this time, errors in the reported roll and pitch angles will be larger than

0.05°. If five or more satellites are being tracked and the indicated PDOP is less than 4.5 then

GAMS begins the On-the-Fly (OTF) ambiguity search, using only the antenna separation distance

to aid the search process. GAMS status displays Not Ready.

4. When the POS Mode transitions to Nav Aligned status, the errors in the reported angles of roll

and pitch will be less than 0.075° RMS. The heading error remains large - in the order 10° to 15°

RMS - unless the vessel performs dynamic manoeuvres, in which case errors may fall to below

5°.

The computed angles of roll and pitch are now sufficiently accurate to be used by GAMS,

together with the antenna separation distance, in the OTF ambiguity search process. Additional

aiding data shortens the time that it takes to fix ambiguities from as long as 20 minutes to as short

as two minutes, depending on the satellite geometry.

5. Once GAMS has resolved the carrier phase ambiguities, the GAMS status displays Ready

Online to indicate that GAMS is ready to provide heading aiding data to the POS MV Kalman

Filter.

This status may exist for up to ten seconds. If it exists beyond 20 seconds then this indicates that,

for some reason, the Kalman Filter may have rejected the GAMS heading aiding data.

6. When the POS MV Kalman Filter begins to process the GAMS heading aiding data GAMS status

displays Online. Within 30 seconds the heading errors should fall to 0.25° RMS and to between

0.02° and 0.15° RMS within two minutes.

7. The GAMS status display will transition from Online to Ready Online to indicate that the POS

MV Kalman Filter has stopped processing GAMS heading aiding data. This can occur if one of

the following conditions arise:

• A one or two-second GNSS data dropout occurs in either/both GNSS receivers. A data

dropout comprises either/both of the following:

o Valid phase observables are available from fewer than four satellites

o The indicated PDOP is greater than 4.5

• The tracking Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) for one or more satellites in either or both

GNSS receivers drops to below 32 Decibels (dB). GAMS processes the observables for a

satellite if the corresponding tracking SNR ratio in both receivers is greater than 30 dB.

The POS MV Kalman Filter rejects GAMS heading aiding data computed from any

marginal observables.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-19

• The POS MV Kalman Filter rejects the GAMS heading aiding data as being inconsistent

with the inertial navigator heading. This can occur if a large multipath error causes GAMS

to temporarily exhibit an unusually large heading error.

Once the cause of the heading aiding data rejection has been cleared, GAMS status displays

Online.

8. The GAMS status display will transition from Online to Not Ready to indicate that GAMS has

reset (i.e. it has abandoned the current fixed phase ambiguities and has restarted the OTF

ambiguity search).

This can occur for two reasons:

• A GNSS data gap occurs and lasts for longer than two seconds. This can be caused by a

blockage of the GNSS signal, for example, as the vessel passes under a bridge.

• GAMS has rejected the current fixed phase ambiguities. This can occur if the carrier

phase ambiguity for a recently acquired satellite is fixed to the wrong integer due to

multipath errors or excessive phase noise.

If the cause of the GAMS reset has been cleared then GAMS will quickly resolve the carrier

phase ambiguities and return to Online status.

Abnormal Behaviour

Abnormal behaviour that occurs after a period of normal operation is symptomatic of environmental

anomalies such as multipath errors, GNSS signal masking, or unexpected changes in IMU or GNSS

antenna geometry.

The following are symptoms of abnormal behaviour together with their possible causes and some

suggested remedies.

Repeated Ambiguity Rejection

Symptom

GAMS repeatedly resolves the carrier phase ambiguities and then rejects

them. This cycle can continue indefinitely or, eventually, POS MV flags the

installation parameters as invalid.

Possible Causes and Remedies

1. Cause - Installation Parameters - The installation parameters are

incorrect or have become incorrect. This can occur if either/both GNSS

antennas move with respect to the IMU by more than a few centimetres or

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-20

if the IMU has moved with respect to the GNSS antennas by more than a

few centimetres.

Remedy - Ensure that you have mounted the antennas and the IMU rigidly

with respect to each other. Measure the correct installation parameters

(Installation Parameters on page 2-24) and re-configure the POS MV

installation parameters (POS MV Configuration on page 4-7).

2. Cause - Multipath Environment - A temporarily high multipath

environment may occur if the vessel passes near a large reflecting surface

such as a large ship or a building. SNR degradation for low elevation

satellites may occur in either/both GNSS receivers if trees, buildings or a

bridge partially masks the satellite signal paths. If, for example, the vessel

has sailed into a harbour where large ships are moored then their hulls

may generate multipath reflections.

Remedy - Move the vessel away from the source of the high multipath

environment.

GAMS Status Remains ‘Ready Online’ Indefinitely

Symptom

The GAMS status display remains Ready Online for several minutes,

although the Navigator Configuration window commands POS MV to use

GAMS. Select Tools, Configuration to see the Navigator Configuration

window.

Possible Causes and Remedies

1. Cause - Incorrect Ambiguity Resolution - GAMS has identified the

wrong carrier phase ambiguities and has computed the wrong heading.

The POS MV Kalman Filter continuously rejects the GAMS heading aiding

data because it is inconsistent with the heading solution computed by the

system without GAMS aiding.

Remedy - Click on the Standby icon on the MV-POSView tool bar to

transition POS MV to standby mode. Then click on the Nav icon to return

to navigate mode. This action will re-initialize POS MV and GAMS.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-21

2. Cause - Incorrect Heading Resolution - POS MV has computed a

heading that is incorrect in spite of the displayed heading accuracy. This

may occur if the POS MV Kalman Filter processes highly inaccurate

GNSS data during the heading alignment.

Remedy - Click on the Standby icon on the tool bar to transition POS MV

to standby mode. Then click on the Nav icon to return to navigate mode.

This action will re-initialize POS MV and GAMS.

3. Cause - Low SNR - GAMS uses one or more satellite observables with a

tracking SNR that is consistently below 32 dB from either/both GNSS

receivers. This can arise from:

• Partial masking of a GNSS signal from a low elevation

satellite; masking of this type may be caused by a bridge,

trees, cliffs or hills along a nearby shore

• Interference from nearby high voltage power lines

• Very long antenna cables or the use of coaxial antenna cables

that have excessive losses at the L1 frequency (1575 MHz)

• GNSS receiver failure

Remedy - The problem of partial masking or interference will go away

when the vessel moves away from the suspected shore-based source of

signal degradation. You can identify a problem with antenna cables by

substituting shorter low-loss cables.

Refer to Figure 38 on page 5-9, Fault Detection window (by selecting

View, Faults), to check the GNSS receiver status and to determine

whether either receiver has reported a fault.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-22

Obvious Incorrect Heading

Symptom

The displayed GAMS status is Online and the displayed POS MV Heading

accuracy is less than 0.15°. However, the displayed POS MV heading is

clearly in error by several degrees.

Possible Causes and Remedies

1. Cause - GAMS has resolved the wrong carrier phase ambiguities and

computes the wrong heading. The heading computed by POS MV has

aligned to the incorrect heading reported by GAMS.

Remedy - Click on the Standby icon on the MV-POSView tool bar to

transition POS MV to the standby mode. Then click on the Nav icon to

return to the navigate mode. This action will re-initialize POS MV and

GAMS.

There may be a problem with the IMU being out of specification. Contact

Applanix for advice.

Repeatedly Rejected Carrier Phase Ambiguities

If GAMS is operating in a high multipath environment there may be repeated ambiguity rejections or an

inability to resolve the carrier phase ambiguities. This may also occur if you experience degraded signal

reception in either/both GNSS receivers due, possibly, to satellites being at a low elevation.

POS MV will continue indefinitely to try to resolve these carrier phase ambiguities. However, if either

GNSS antenna has moved by more than a few centimetres with respect to the IMU, GAMS will never be

able to resolve ambiguities until you have completed another calibration.

Provided there has been no change to the relative mounting positions of the antennas or the IMU, the

displayed GAMS status will become Ready Online when GAMS resolves the carrier phase ambiguities.

GAMS status will show Not Ready if GAMS has started a new OTF search.

Without GAMS heading aiding, the POS MV heading accuracy will degrade slowly at an approximate rate

of one arc-minute per minute of operation. This slow rate of deterioration allows sufficient time to remove

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-23

the vessel from the source of GNSS signal degradation while it continues to maintain an acceptable

heading accuracy.

Once you have removed the vessel from the source of GNSS signal degradation, GAMS status should

become Online.

Installation Parameters

Figure 46 shows the GAMS Parameter Setup window. Refer to Antenna Installation Calibration on page

4-18 for instructions on how to configure this window with the GAMS installation parameters.

Once you have identified the GAMS installation parameters correctly, save them to Non-Volatile Memory

(NVM). It is unlikely you will ever need to modify these parameters again unless you move either/both

GNSS antennas or the IMU.

Figure 46: POSView GAMS Parameters Setup

GAMS uses the installation parameters to aid the OTF search algorithm. Please note the following:

• If the antenna separation and the surveyed antenna baseline vector installation parameters are

zero, then the GAMS OTF search algorithm runs completely unaided. GAMS can be forced to

operate in this mode by clearing the GAMS installation parameters.

• If the surveyed antenna baseline vector components are zero, and:

o The antenna separations are non-zero, or

o If the non-zero surveyed antenna baseline vector components are flagged as invalid, then

o The GAMS OTF algorithm assumes the non-zero antenna separation to be correct, and

o Uses the antenna separation to aid the OTF carrier phase ambiguity search.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

System Operation

5-24

You can force GAMS to operate in this mode by clearing the GAMS installation parameters and

then entering an antenna separation distance.

• If the surveyed antenna baseline vector components and the antenna separation are non-zero

and flagged as valid, then the GAMS OTF algorithm uses the complete set of parameters to aid

the OTF search process.

If the POS MV roll and pitch errors are less than 0.25° RMS, GAMS constrains the ambiguity

search space to a circle centred on the primary GNSS antenna (ANT 1). Ambiguity resolution in

these circumstances takes less than five minutes.

Additionally, if the POS MV heading error is of the order of 1.0° to 2.0°, then the ambiguity is a small arc

of the circle containing one or two candidate sets of ambiguities. In these circumstances, ambiguity

resolution is nearly instantaneous and occurs in less than 10 seconds.

Stand-Alone Operation

Note: Prior to power-on and POS MV operation in stand-alone mode, the AutoStart feature must be

enabled. Refer AutoStart on page 4-13 for instructions on how to enable AutoStart. The following

instructions assume that you have enabled the AutoStart feature.

Follow the Power-On instructions on page 4-1 to power-on the POS MV. The system will initialize using

the configuration parameters that it holds in NVM. These include the IP address, the installation

parameters, the output configuration, the heave filter parameters and the data groups that you selected

for output on the display, and real-time and logging data ports. Once the system is initialized, it will begin

to output data across the enabled ports.

Refer to the Data Logging instructions page 5-10 for a full description of the data logging facilities

available for the POS MV.

When the system operates in stand-alone mode, the front panel status LED on the PCS continues to

provide an indication of the system status as described in the Power-On instructions on page 4-1.

In stand-alone mode, whichever outputs you enabled and saved to the NVM will be available from the

PCS. Data output will begin when the status LED, on the PCS front panel, begins to flash green.

The PCS will begin to broadcast Ethernet data as soon as the POS MV is powered-on. The Ethernet

messages contain only POS MV status and time until the status LED begins to flash green, at which time

the PCS will start to broadcast all the selected output groups.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

TrueHeave Operation

6-1

6.0 TrueHeave Operation

Overview

TrueHeaveTM provides an estimate of vessel heave during conditions that often defeat traditional real-time

heave filters. The POS MV TrueHeave solution uses algorithms that provide a zero phase response

across the range of 0.03 to 0.2 Hz (30 to 5 s). Traditional real-time heave solutions tend to exhibit their

most notable artefacts in long (>16 s) period swell conditions, often encountered with vessels in following

seas. The frequency range of the TrueHeave solution dramatically reduces such low frequency artefacts.

Figure 47 illustrates the relationship of the TrueHeave solution to the current real-time approach and

shows how it is computed and applied.

Figure 47: TrueHeave Functional Block Diagram

Configuration Requirements

TrueHeave is a turnkey solution and requires none of the tuning of standard real-time heave solutions.

Initialization Requirements

TrueHeave requires a period of up to five minutes after the commencement of navigation in order to

initialize. After this initial period, no further initialization or settling time is required.

Data Output

The TrueHeave solution is provided at the Ethernet interface, LAN port. Details of the output message

format are provided in the POS MV V5 User Interface Control Document (Applanix document control

number - PUBS-ICD-004089). This delayed output is provided by the Group 111 heave data message

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

TrueHeave Operation

6-2

which provides the TrueHeave output, the equivalent of the real-time heave solution and the applicable

Time of Validity (TOV) signal. Group 113 contains the associated performance metrics.

Groups 111 and 113 data are output on the real-time Ethernet data port at a rate of 25 Hz to provide

sufficient resolution on the Heave Data display, see Figure 48. It may be selected for internal or Ethernet

logging.

Note: The heave data output, in real-time, is in no way affected by the addition of TrueHeave; it can and

should continue to be used as normal.

Figure 48: POSView Heave Data

TrueHeave Procedure

Use the following procedure to enable the TrueHeave feature prior to its first use.

1. Initialize POS MV ensuring that all pre-set user accuracy values are acceptable. This is indicated

by green light buttons adjacent to the Attitude, Heading, Position, Velocity and Heading labels in

the Accuracy pane on the MV-POSView Controller, see Figure 49.

2. View real-time heave and TrueHeave data by selecting View, Heave Plot, see Figure 48. Due to

the delay inherent in creating the TrueHeave solution, the heave data plot remains blank for the

first three minutes after initialization.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

TrueHeave Operation

6-3

Figure 49: POSView Status and Accuracy Panes

3. TrueHeave data may be used two ways:

a) To adjust the real-time heave parameters to improve the real-time data available on the COM

ports

b) To log the TrueHeave data for post-mission processing

4. Refer to the Data Logging procedures on page 5-10, noting the following points:

a) Select the 111 Heave data and 113 Heave data quality control check boxes in the Ethernet

Logging Control window

b) Since there is a three-minute delay between real-time and the calculation of the equivalent

TrueHeave solution, logging must continue for at least three minutes past the end of the

survey session or line

Following the survey, the TrueHeave data may be analysed offline by third party post-processing

software. Contact Applanix for a list of software packages which currently provide support for TrueHeave,

refer to page A-1.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Specifications

7-1

7.0 Specifications

POS MV 320

Main Specifications (with Differential Corrections)

Roll, Pitch accuracy:

0.02 (1 sigma with GNSS or DGNSS)

0.01 (1 sigma with RTK)

Heave Accuracy:

5 cm or 5% (whichever is greater) for periods of 20 s

or less

Heading Accuracy:

0.02 (1 sigma) with 2 m antenna baseline, 0.01 (1

sigma) with 4 m baseline

RTK Positioning

Accuracy

Horizontal: ±(10 mm + 1 ppm x baseline length)

Vertical: ±(20 mm + 1 ppm x baseline length)

Note: RTK accuracies assume 1 m IMU-GNSS

antenna offset

DGPS Positioning

Accuracy

0.5 - 2 m (1 sigma) depending on quality of differential

corrections

Velocity Accuracy:

0.03 m/s horizontal

During GNSS Outages

Roll, Pitch accuracy:

0.02 (1 sigma)

Heave accuracy:

5 cm or 5% (whichever is greater) for wave periods of

18s or less

Heading accuracy:

Drift less than 1° per hour (negligible for outages <

60 s)

Position accuracy

degradation:

2.5 m (1 sigma) for 30 s outages

<6 m (1 sigma) for 60 s outages

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Specifications

7-2

POS MV WaveMaster & WaveMaster RM

Main Specifications (with Differential Corrections)

Roll, Pitch accuracy:

0.03 (1 sigma with GNSS or DGNSS)

0.02 (1 sigma with RTK)

Heave Accuracy:

5 cm or 5% (whichever is greater) for periods of 20 s

or less

Heading Accuracy:

0.03 (1 sigma) with 2 m antenna baseline, 0.015 (1

sigma) with 4 m baseline

RTK Positioning

Accuracy

Horizontal: ±(10 mm + 1 ppm x baseline length)

Vertical: ±(20 mm + 1 ppm x baseline length)

Note: RTK accuracies assume 1 m IMU-GNSS

antenna offset

DGPS Positioning

Accuracy

0.5 - 2 m (1 sigma) depending on quality of differential

corrections

Velocity Accuracy:

0.05 m/s horizontal

During GNSS Outages

Roll, Pitch accuracy:

0.04 (1 sigma)

Heave accuracy:

5 cm or 5% (whichever is greater) for wave periods of

18 s or less

Heading accuracy:

Drift less than 2° per hour

Position accuracy

degradation:

3 m (1 sigma) for 30 s outages

<10 m (1 sigma) for 60 s outages

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Specifications

7-3

Physical Characteristics

Size and Weight

Size

Weight

MV 320

IMU type 26

203 mm X 203 mm X 116 mm

2.1 kg

IMU type 36

158 mm X 158 mm X 124 mm

2.5 kg

IMU type 38

208 mm  X 196 mm

5.5 kg Al, 8.4 kg Ti,

13 kg SS

IMU type 40

131 mm X 163 mm X 124 mm

1.8 kg

WaveMaster & WaveMaster RM

IMU type 26

203 mm X 203 mm X 116 mm

2.1 kg

IMU type 37

158 mm X 158 mm X 124 mm

2.5 kg

IMU type 39

208 mm  X 196 mm

5.5 kg Al, 8.4 kg Ti,

13 kg SS

Elite

IMU type 21

200 mm X 197 mm X 176 mm

4.8 kg 1

IMU type 33

229 mm X 315 mm X 196 mm

3.5 kg

PCS (POS MV V5):

483 mm X 44 mm X 334 mm

3.9 kg

PCS (POS MV V5-1):

167 mm X 185 mm X 68 mm

2.5 kg

Zephyr GNSS Antenna:

165 mm  X 76 mm

0.64 kg

382AP GNSS Antenna:

146 mm  X 63 mm

0.5 kg

Power

IMU:

Power provided by PCS

PCS POS MV V5:

Voltage:

90 Vac to 264 Vac, 47 to 63 Hz, auto-switching

Current:

1.1 A Max (@ 90 V)

PCS POS MV V5-1:

Voltage:

10 Vdc to 34 Vdc 1

Current:

5.5 A Max (@ 10 Vdc)

GNSS Antennas:

Power provided by PCS

Notes:

1 – minimum acceptable input voltage supplied to the MV V5-1 PCS depends on the IMU type and length of

IMU cable. Contact Applanix for details.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Specifications

7-4

Environmental

Temperature Range (Operating)

IMU:

-40 C to +60 C

-40 F to +140 F

PCS POS MV V5:

POS MV V5-1:

-20 C to +55 C

-4 F to +131 F

GNSS Antenna:

-40 C to +70 C

-40 F to +158 F

Temperature Range (Storage)

IMU:

-40 C to +60 C

-40 F to +140 F

PCS:

-40 C to +70 C

-40 F to +158 F

GNSS Antenna:

-50 C to +70 C

-58 F to +158 F

Humidity

IMU (320)

10 - 80% RH, Ingress Protection of 65

IMU (WaveMaster &

WaveMaster RM):

0 - 100% RH, Ingress Protection of 66

PCS (POS MV V5):

10 - 80% RH, non-condensing

PCS (POS MV V5-1):

0 - 100% RH, Ingress Protection of 66

GNSS Antenna:

0 - 100% RH

Shock & Vibration (IMU)

320

Operating:

90 g, 6 ms terminal saw tooth

Non-Operating:

220 g, 5 ms half-sine

WaveMaster & WaveMaster RM

Operating:

35 g, 6 ms terminal saw tooth

Non-Operating:

40 g, 5 ms half-sine

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Tools and Diagnostics

8-1

8.0 Tools and Diagnostics

The Position and Orientation System for Marine Vessels (POS MV) provides a diagnostics function to

help solve some of the problems that may arise when connecting the system within an integrated suite of

survey equipment.

GNSS Configuration

Upon installation, the POS MV configures the GNSS receivers so that they output only those messages

used by the system. When necessary, the POS Computer System (PCS) will reconfigure the receivers

automatically if either one ever loses its configuration for any reason.

Additionally, you can send the GNSS configuration message to the GNSS receivers manually by

selecting Tools, Configure GNSS from the MV-POSView menu bar.

GNSS Reset

The MV-POSView Controller program allows you to send a reset command to the GNSS receivers. To do

this, select Tools, Reset GNSS from the MV-POSView menu bar.

Once the reset command is initiated, the GNSS receivers will take approximately two minutes before they

return to the navigation mode and POS MV can use their data.

Use the GNSS reset feature only as a final option if the receivers exhibit inexplicable, uncharacteristic

behaviour. Examples of such behaviour include a failure to track satellites, a failure to compute or a

failure to output a valid navigation solution for an extended period. Before using the GNSS reset feature,

verify that you cannot attribute the cause to faults in cables or connectors.

GNSS Data

Select View, GNSS Data from the MV-POSView menu bar to view the GNSS Data window shown in

Figure 50.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Tools and Diagnostics

8-2

Figure 50: POSView GNSS Data

The GNSS Data window shows the GNSS navigation status in a polar style display. POSMV generates

an identification number for each satellite in use and indicates its location in the sky, with the centre of the

display directly overhead. From this display, a person can deduce if a satellite signal is being blocked.

The bottom of the window displays a list of the satellites in solution and includes details of their Signal-to-

Noise Ratios (SNR) at the important L1 frequency (L1 SNR). Low SNR values for all satellites could

indicate deterioration in the quality of the GNSS antenna cable. The window will show the L2 SNR for

L1/L2 GNSS, if fitted.

Diagnostics

POS MV provides both control and display diagnostic functions. The control functions permit the selection

and setting of various binary outputs to specific values. The display functions allow the viewing of real-

time parameters. This provides POS MV with a debugging function that can be used to establish a

successful integration of the system into an extended suite of survey equipment.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Tools and Diagnostics

8-3

Control Diagnostics

Diagnostic values that are entered and enabled for the digital ports will replace any real-time attitude

information on those channels. To resume normal operation, disable the diagnostic output for the relevant

channel.

Enter and enable diagnostic values by following the steps below. The diagnostic values that are entered

have no effect on the configuration of affected ports; refer to Figure 51.

1. On the MV-POSView menu bar, select Settings, Diagnostics Control, Binary to open the

Diagnostics window.

2. Select the appropriate tab and enter the diagnostic values for the displayed parameters in the

Operator Input pane.

3. Select the Enable option in the Output pane.

4. Select the OK or Apply button. The diagnostic values then appear on the appropriate output port,

using the current configuration for that port.

5. Return to normal operation by performing the following steps:

a) Set all values in the Operator Input pane to zero (optional)

b) Select the Disable option in the Output pane

c) Finally, select the OK or Apply button

Figure 51: POSView Binary Diagnostics

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Tools and Diagnostics

8-4

Display Diagnostics

Display diagnostics permit the operator to view selected POS MV real-time internal data as an aid to

debugging system problems. Select Diagnostics on the MV-POSView menu bar to display the following

selections:

• Primary GNSS

• Display, Data & NVM

• Secondary GNSS

• Time & Pulses

• Base GNSS (Base 1 and Base 2)

• IMU

• Aux GNSS

• NMEA & Binary Output

• Control Port

• Other

Contact Applanix Customer Support for assistance, see page A-1

Regular Maintenance

Important:

1. Equipment shall be serviced only by qualified personnel.

2. The PCS (POS MV V5 and POS MV V5-1) shall be grounded via the safety ground screw or stud.

3. Power to the POS system should be protected by a user-supplied, resettable circuit breaker.

POS MV has a minimal requirement for scheduled maintenance on its subassemblies and components.

Performing these procedures at the recommended intervals enables the POS MV to maintain the highest

standard of service and performance throughout its lifetime.

Inertial Measurement Unit

The IMU contains sensitive and expensive solid-state

accelerometer and gyro components. Permanent damage to

these components will result if handled roughly.

IMPORTANT

Unauthorised opening of the IMU housing will void the warranty. The

IMU is a sealed unit that contains no user serviceable parts and does

not require internal maintenance.

Maintenance Procedures:

• Wipe the IMU housing with a damp cloth every six months, or more often if necessary, to protect

the finish and to remove oil and salt deposits.

• Check the cables and connectors for signs of damage, degradation or contamination. Repair or

renew them as necessary.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Tools and Diagnostics

8-5

• Ensure that cables are securely connected.

GNSS Antennas

Do not place metallized labels on the radome. Signal

attenuation will result.

Maintenance Procedures:

• Use fresh water to wash any deposits of salt or other contamination from the antennas.

• Inspect the antennas, cables and connectors every six months, or more often if necessary, for

signs of damage, degradation or contamination. Repair or renew them as necessary.

• Ensure that cables are securely connected.

• When operating in very cold conditions, use an appropriate method to remove any ice

accumulation from the antennas.

POS Computer System

If you protect the PCS from moisture and dust in its mounting location, the unit will require very little

regular maintenance.

Maintenance Procedures:

• Wipe the PCS housing with a damp cloth every six months, or more often if necessary, to protect

the finish and to remove oil and dust deposits.

• Check all cables and connectors for signs of damage, degradation or contamination. Repair or

renew them as necessary.

• Ensure that cables are securely connected.

Technical Support

Refer to the Technical Support and Service information and procedures on page A-1.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-1

9.0 Fault Identification

Important:

1. Equipment shall be serviced only by qualified personnel.

2. The PCS (POS MV V5 and POS MV V5-1) shall be grounded via the safety ground screw or stud.

3. Power to the POS system should be protected by a user-supplied, resettable circuit breaker.

Position and Orientation System for Marine Vessels (POS MV) development efforts are centred on the

need for the system to operate for long periods in rigorous marine environments with minimal

maintenance requirements.

POS MV incorporates self-diagnostics in the form of a Fault Detection Isolation and Reconfiguration

(FDIR) algorithm. FDIR monitors the health of the various system components and, in the case of sensor

degradation or failure, automatically reconfigures the system to minimise the effect of the degradation.

The POS MV uses two methods simultaneously, to inform you that the system has experienced a failure

or performance degradation:

• Lights on the POS Computer System (PCS) front panel will show a fault condition

• The MV-POSView Controller program will provide a more detailed description of the problem

By planning and conducting regular maintenance procedures, described in the Regular Maintenance

description starting on page 8-4, the POS MV will continue to provide a high standard of service and

performance.

If you suspect a fault condition on the POS MV, follow the instructions in this section of the manual to

identify the cause. Field maintenance procedures allow the following operations only:

• Identifying problems associated with system integration

• Identifying the cause of system failures

• Repairing the system by replacement of the PCS, cables, or sensing subsystems

Component Description

POS MV comprises the following subsystem components:

• One Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU)

• One POS Computer System (PCS)

• Two Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) antennas

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-2

In addition to the above hardware, the POS MV includes all cables to interconnect the components of the

system and certain additional cables that can be used to connect to external equipment.

Previous sections of this manual describe the cables, the connection ports and the data formats; refer to

the Table of Contents at the beginning of the manual or the Index at the end of the manual for specific

items. The Handling Precautions on page 2-1 describes the precautions that should be exercised when

unpacking and installing the POS MV subsystems.

Inertial Measurement Unit

The IMU contains sensitive and expensive solid-state

accelerometer and gyro components. Permanent damage to

these components will result if handled roughly.

The IMU includes an orthogonal array comprising three accelerometers and three gyros. The

accelerometers sense translational acceleration along one of three axis (x, y, and z) and the gyros sense

angular rate around each axis. Incremental velocities and angles are output across a digital interface to

the PCS.

The IMU is a sensitive device and must be handled carefully to prevent damage to the sensing elements.

Refer to the Inertial Measurement Unit description on page 2-1 for instructions pertaining to IMU handling

and care.

GNSS Antennas

Do not place metallized labels on the radome. Signal

attenuation will result.

The GNSS antennas are solid state devices with no moving parts. They are rugged and reliable and, with

a little care, will provide long-term trouble free operation. Follow the steps outlined in the GNSS Antennas

topic on page 8-5 to maintain their operating efficiency.

To prevent damage caused by moisture ingress, ensure that the TNC connection between the GNSS

antenna receptacle and its mating cable plug is waterproof. Use a good waterproof tape and sealant.

POS Computer System

Note: An optional field support kit includes a replacement PCS.

The PCS contains a computer module, an interface module, two GNSS receivers, and power supplies for

the internal electronics and the remote IMU. Constructed of rugged, industrial grade components, the

PCS should be handled with care to minimize risk of damage.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-3

Fault Identification

Field maintenance for the POS MV involves the following actions:

• Identification of a fault condition

• Repair of the fault by substitution or product return

POS MV has self-diagnostics to assist with isolating a fault to the following subsystems:

• IMU subsystem, including the IMU and the IMU cable

• PCS subsystem

• GNSS subsystem, including the GNSS antennas, GNSS antenna cables and GNSS receivers

If POS MV detects a failure condition in either the GNSS or IMU subsystems, it will use two methods to

alert you:

• Indicates a fault condition through status lights on the PCS front panel

• Outputs appropriate status warning messages to the various MV-POSView Controller windows

(Fault Detection and Message Log)

The following paragraphs describe both types of failure indications.

Front Panel Indicators

The lights on the PCS front panel display status information about the PCS system. To isolate faults

follow the advice and instructions provided in Table 35.

Figure 52: POS MV V5 Front Panel

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-4

Figure 53: POS MV V5-1 Front Panel

Table 35: PCS Front Panel Indicators - Fault Identification

Status light - indicates current status of POS MV:

Steady red:

POS LV failure - shows red when PCS is first

powered-on. Changes to a valid condition when PCS

internal program begins to run, but will turn red again

if there is a fault in PCS.

If a fault occurs, do not power-off PCS. Refer to

Fault Detection window of controller program, see

Fault Detection starting on page 9-4.

Steady amber:

Standby mode - POS MV is waiting for instructions.

Flashing amber:

Navigate mode - initialising and aligning attitude

(coarse levelling).

Flashing green:

Navigate mode - degraded attitude performance.

Attitude measurements are acceptable but do not

meet user-set accuracy limits.

Steady green:

Navigate mode - normal system operation. System

meets accuracy limits set by user for position,

velocity, attitude and heading.

Logging light - indicates status of removable logging device.

Steady green:

Removable logging device is active and recording

data.

Steady amber:

Logging media is > 80% full.

Steady red:

Logging has failed – check that there is a USB flash

drive in the logging bay and that the device is not

full.

Power light - illuminates when the PCS is operating.

Fault Detection

To access the Fault Detection window select View, Faults from the MV-POSView menu bar. This

window, shown in Figure 54, shows the faults detected by the POS MV during operation. A fault is

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-5

present if an indicator shows red against any item in the list. Three tabs provide a list of the system health

monitoring items: General, IMU and GNSS Corrections.

If you suspect that a fault condition has occurred, but the Fault Detection window does not show it,

check the Message Log. The Message Log description starting on page 9-9 lists the possible messages

that may appear in the message log. Of interest, at this point, are the items in Figure 54. The monitored

items are organized by category and each fault has a brief description.

If you suspect that the system has developed a fault, note the condition of the indicators on the Fault

Detection window. If necessary, contact Applanix for advice, refer to Technical Support and Service on

page A-1 for procedures.

General Tab

The Primary GNSS pane, Figure 54, shows the status of the primary GNSS receiver and any faults

reported by it. If this pane reports any persistent faults, they could be caused by a faulty GNSS antenna

or its cable.

The Secondary GNSS pane monitors the data gaps from the secondary GNSS receiver. A persistent

loss of secondary GNSS information will prevent GNSS Azimuth Measurement Subsystem (GAMS) from

performing carrier phase differential measurements to determine the heading. Investigate the secondary

GNSS antenna and its cable as a possible cause of persistent data gaps.

Data gaps experienced by both GNSS receivers simultaneously are likely to occur if nearby buildings or

structures block the satellite signals (this is not a system fault). During such data gaps, the POS MV will

continue to navigate inertially with only a gradual degradation in position and heading accuracy.

The Auxiliary GNSS pane reports the status of navigation solutions supplied from any auxiliary GNSS

receiver connected to the PCS.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-6

Figure 54: POSView Fault Detection

The IMU pane reports the status of the IMU, with additional information appearing on the IMU tab shown

in Figure 55. There is also an additional field that appears at the bottom left-hand side of each Fault

Detection tab to show the number of bad data frames received from the IMU. An occurrence of several

consecutive bad IMU frames will cause the POS MV to reinitialize and start coarse levelling.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-7

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-8

Figure 55: POSView Fault Detection - IMU and GNSS Corr. Tabs

IMU Tab

The IMU Status pane, Figure 55, identifies the raw status bits from the IMU. If any of these bits have a

red light please contact Applanix Customer Support representative for assistance, refer to page A-1.

GNSS Corr. Tab

The In Use pane, Figure 55, shows the types of corrections that the navigation algorithm may use. A

green light indicates the item that is currently being used.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-9

The Base GNSS pane indicates the status of received data on the base GNSS COM port. A green light

indicated no problems; a red light indicates a problem.

Message Log

Access the Message Log by selecting View, Message Log from the MV-POSView menu bar, see

Figure 56.

Figure 56: POSView Message Log

Table 36 contains messages that can appear in the message log. Messages marked with an asterisk (*)

relate to indicators on the Fault Detection window.

Note: Some cases of incorrect GNSS configuration is handled automatically if the GNSS automatic

reconfiguration feature is enabled (select Enabled in the Auto Configuration pane on the GNSS

Receiver Configuration window). The automatic reconfiguration logic checks for expected messages

from the GNSS receiver, and will send a configuration command to the receiver if the expected messages

are not present. The contents of messages are not checked.

Table 36: Message Log Entries

Message Text

Description

*PPS data not received

Time recovery data not received

PPS data received

Flag reset

HDOP data not received

Dilution of precision data not

received; receiver not configured

properly; send configuration file

HDOP data received

Flag reset

*Ephemeris data gap detected

There is a gap in GNSS data; Short

periods when this occurs are normal

Ephemeris data gap cleared

Flag reset

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-10

Message Text

Description

*Primary GNSS raw observable data

gap detected

There is a gap in GNSS data; short

periods when this occurs are normal

Primary GNSS raw observable data

gap cleared

Flag reset

*Secondary GNSS raw observable

data gap detected

There is a gap in GNSS data; short

periods when this occurs are normal

Secondary GNSS raw observable

data gap cleared

Flag reset

*Auxiliary GNSS data gap detected

There is a gap in auxiliary GNSS

data

Auxiliary GNSS data gap cleared

Flag reset

Horizontal acceleration out of range

Receiver not configured properly

Horizontal acceleration out of range

cleared

Flag reset

*GNSS not available for alignment

POS MV failed to receive GNSS data

for > 60 s

GNSS available for alignment

Flag reset

*GNSS data gap detected

Gap in GNSS data; short periods

when this occurs are normal

GNSS data gap cleared

Gap discontinued

*PPS time gap

Gap in PPS signal; short periods

when this occurs are normal

PPS time gap cleared

Gap discontinued

Time recovery message not

received

The GNSS receiver is not configured

properly

Time recovery message received

Flag reset

*GNSS not in navigate mode

GNSS receiver has not entered

navigate mode; still searching for

satellites

GNSS in navigate mode

Receiver in navigation mode

*GNSS tracking elevation limit

incorrect

GNSS receiver is not configured

GNSS tracking elevation limit

corrected

Flag reset

HDOP/VDOP less than 10

GNSS receiver is not configured

HDOP/VDOP less than 10 cleared

Flag reset

GPS Time output mode is not UTC

GNSS receiver is not configured

GPS Time output mode is UTC

Flag reset

Incorrect time parameters

GNSS receiver is not configured

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-11

Message Text

Description

Incorrect time parameters cleared

Flag reset

Incorrect GNSS datum parameters

The GNSS receiver is not configured

properly

Incorrect GNSS datum parameters

cleared

Flag reset

Position/velocity fix error

Positions and velocities reported by

the IMU and the GNSS are

inconsistent; likely cause is an

incorrect entry of GNSS lever arms in

the installation data

Position/velocity fix error cleared

Flag reset

Incorrect differential GNSS

configuration cleared

Flag reset

Incorrect SV selection parameters

The GNSS receiver is not configured

properly

Incorrect SV selection parameters

cleared

Flag reset

GAMS ambiguity resolution failure

The GNSS receiver is not configured

properly

GAMS ambiguity resolution failure

cleared

Flag reset

GNSS failure

GNSS velocity or position failure

GNSS failure cleared

Flag reset

*Speed out of range fault

Navigation algorithm speed is out of

range (speed > 35 m/s); algorithm

will reset itself

Speed out of range fault cleared

Flag reset

*GNSS velocity failure

GNSS reports speed > 35 m/s;

problem will probably correct itself

GNSS velocity failure cleared

Flag reset

*GNSS position failure

GNSS reports horizontal position

error > 1000 m; problem will

eventually correct itself

GNSS position failure cleared

Flag reset

Auxiliary GNSS position failure

The GNSS receiver is not configured

properly

Auxiliary GNSS position failure

cleared

Flag reset

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-12

Message Text

Description

*GNSS position measurement

rejected

Position reported between IMU and

GNSS are inconsistent; likely GNSS

Lever Arms are incorrect in

installation data

GNSS position measurement reject

cleared

Flag reset

*GNSS velocity measurement

rejected

Velocity reported between IMU and

GNSS are inconsistent; likely GNSS

Lever Arms are incorrect in

installation data

GNSS velocity measurement reject

cleared

Flag reset

GAMS heading failure

The GNSS receiver is not configured

properly

GAMS heading failure cleared

Flag reset

Aux GNSS position measurement

rejection

The GNSS receiver is not configured

properly

Aux GNSS position rejection cleared

Flag reset

IMU Messages - Message Log

*Multiple consecutive IMU failures

Communications problem between

IMU and PCS; check cable

Multiple consecutive IMU failures

cleared

Flag reset

IMU X accelerometer failure

IMU diagnostics indicate failure of X

accelerometer channel

IMU X accelerometer failure cleared

Flag reset

IMU Y accelerometer failure

IMU diagnostics indicate failure of Y

accelerometer channel

IMU Y accelerometer failure cleared

Flag reset

IMU Z accelerometer failure

IMU diagnostics indicate failure of Z

accelerometer channel

IMU Z accelerometer failure cleared

Flag reset

IMU X gyro failure

IMU diagnostics indicate failure of X

gyro channel

IMU X gyro failure cleared

Flag reset

IMU Y gyro failure

IMU diagnostics indicate failure of Y

gyro channel

IMU Y gyro failure cleared

Flag reset

IMU Z gyro failure

IMU diagnostics indicate failure of Z

gyro channel

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-13

IMU Messages - Message Log

IMU Z gyro failure cleared

Flag reset

IMU A/D converter failure

IMU diagnostics indicate failure of

A/D converter

IMU A/D converter failure cleared

Flag reset

IMU pickoff test failure

IMU diagnostics indicate failure of

voltage pickoff

IMU pickoff test failure cleared

Flag reset

IMU power supply failure

IMU diagnostics indicate problems in

external power delivered to IMU

IMU power supply failure cleared

Flag reset

*IMU/POS checksum error

Error in data checksum between

POS MV and IMU

IMU/POS checksum error cleared

Flag reset

IMU failure

IMU status test failure set by IMU

sensor

IMU failure cleared

Flag reset

IMU warning

One of the IMU bias estimates is out

of range

IMU warning cleared

Flag reset

X accelerometer bias estimate out of

range

The Kalman Filter’s estimate of the X

accelerometer bias is outside the

allowable range of 4000 micro-g

X accelerometer bias estimate error

cleared

Flag reset

Y accelerometer bias estimate out of

range

The Kalman Filter’s estimate of the Y

accelerometer bias is outside the

allowable range of 4000 micro-g

Y accelerometer bias estimate error

cleared

Flag reset

Z accelerometer bias estimate out of

range

The Kalman Filter’s estimate of the Z

accelerometer bias is outside the

allowable range of 4000 micro-g

Z accelerometer bias estimate error

cleared

Flag reset

X gyro bias estimate out of range

The Kalman Filter’s estimate of the X

gyro bias is outside the allowable

range of 20 deg/hr

X gyro bias estimate error cleared

Flag reset

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-14

IMU Messages - Message Log

Y gyro bias estimate out of range

The Kalman Filter’s estimate of the Y

gyro bias is outside the allowable

range of 20 deg/hr

Y gyro bias estimate error cleared

Flag reset

Z gyro bias estimate out of range

The Kalman Filter’s estimate of the Z

gyro bias is outside the allowable

range of 20 deg/hr

Z gyro bias estimate error cleared

Flag reset

*These messages correspond to faults reported by the Fault Detection

window.

Status Warning Messages

POS MV provides status information on the complete system and each individual subsystem. The MV-

POSView Controller program decodes some of the bits automatically and displays the relevant status

information. Some examples of the faults represented by the status bits appear in Table 37.

Table 37: Status Warning Messages

IMU

The IMU can experience a communication failure between the IMU

and the PCS, or a loss of calibration.

Communication Failure

The IMU can experience a permanent or intermittent communication

failure. If the IMU develops a fault that causes permanent loss of

communication, you will see the following symptoms:

• The IMU front panel light will show clear (off).

• The IMU tab on the Fault Detection window will show intermittent

failures in IMU communications.

• The IMU transmits a checksum in each data frame. POS MV uses

the checksum to validate the data received from the IMU. If the

validation fails, then POS MV sets a bit to declare that it has

detected a bad IMU frame.

Simultaneously, it increments a counter that keeps track of the

number of bad IMU frames. The Fault Detection window shows

the count of Bad IMU Frames in its bottom left-hand corner.

• An occurrence of several consecutive bad IMU frames will cause

POS MV to reinitialize and start coarse levelling. However, due to

the communications handshaking used by the IMU, bad IMU

frames are highly unlikely.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-15

IMU

If bad IMU frames do occur, their likely cause is one of the following:

• Problems in the data cable that connects the IMU to the PCS

• Problems with the IMU or the power supplied to the IMU

• Problems within the PCS

Loss of Calibration

If IMU performance falls below specification (as may happen if the

IMU experiences excessive shock or vibration), the IMU Status field

on the controller main window will indicate an IMU failure.

Refer to the Fault Detection and the Message log windows

(described in Fault Identification on page 9-3 and Message Log on

page 9-9) for a more detailed identification of the fault.

Note: If POS MV detects that the IMU performance is outside

specification, it will alert you and continue navigation.

If POS MV detects a hardware failure in the IMU, the controller main

window will display the warning message IMU Failure. Note any

indications on the Fault Detection or the Message Log windows, and

contact Applanix for advice.

GNSS

The GNSS subsystem can experience a permanent loss of satellites,

or a breakdown of communication between the GNSS receiver and

the PCS.

Permanent Loss of Satellites

POS MV provides continuous information on the status of the GNSS

receivers. The status of the GNSS receivers may be monitored on the

GNSS Data window; select View, GNSS Data from the MV-POSView

menu bar. Additionally, the GNSS Data window includes detailed

information on the satellites that the receiver is tracking and on the

receiver mode (i.e. tracking, navigate, etc).

The GNSS subsystem may experience periodic GNSS dropouts

caused, for example, by antenna obstruction. The controller program

indicates a GNSS dropout by displaying GNSS Not Available or

GNSS Data Gap in the GNSS Status field on the main window.

However, if a GNSS dropout occurs and persists without any

apparent antenna obstruction, then one of the following problems may

exist:

• A loss of GNSS receiver configuration

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-16

GNSS

• A failure in the GNSS antenna

• A failure in the GNSS antenna cable

• A failure in the GNSS receiver

The above diagnoses assume that the PCS continues to receive

messages from the primary GNSS receiver. If this is true, the front

panel GNSS light will behave normally for the GNSS service in use.

If the front panel GNSS light shows red, then there are no GNSS

navigation solutions available to the PCS. The most likely cause of

this is a loss of communication with the receiver. If this occurs, refer to

the following Loss of Communications heading.

Correct a loss of configuration by selecting Tools, Configure GNSS

from the MV-POSView menu bar.

The GNSS antenna is a solid-state device with a low failure rate.

Faults in the GNSS subsystem are more likely to arise from damaged

antenna cabling or a receiver failure. If examination of the GNSS

antenna installation reveals damage to a cable, replace the cable.

If none of the above actions resolves the problem, contact Applanix

for advice.

Loss of Communications

If the front panel GNSS light shows red, then there is a

communications failure between the PCS and the primary GNSS

receiver. Typical causes for this fault are:



• A loss of GNSS receiver configuration



• There is a failure in the internal PCS wiring harness

• There is a failure in the GNSS receiver

If Auto Configuration is enabled (select Enabled in the Auto

Configuration pane on the GNSS Receiver Configuration window),

then during the power-on sequence the PCS will establish a proper

configuration for the GNSS receiver. Therefore, incorrect settings for

baud rate should not be possible unless the Auto Configuration

feature is disabled.

The GNSS receiver may be configured manually be sending a

configuration command by selecting Tools, Configure GNSS from

the controller menu bar.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-17

GNSS

If proper operation is not restored within a minute, select Tools,

Reset GNSS from the controller menu bar. The GNSS receiver is

reset to the factory defaults. This action takes a couple of minutes.

Also. if the auto configuration feature is enabled, the receiver will

assume an appropriate POS configuration.

Finally, if all else fails, cycle the PCS power (off and on) to provide a

hard reset of the GNSS receiver. Refer to the Power-On and Power-

Off procedures on pages 4-1 and 4-24 respectively.

GAMS

The GAMS subsystem can experience a permanent loss of satellites,

or a communication failure between the GNSS receiver and the PCS.

Permanent Loss of Satellites

The GAMS Solution window provides information on satellites being

tracked and the status of GAMS; select View, GAMS Solution to

view this window.

GAMS may experience periodic GNSS dropouts caused, for example,

by an antenna obstruction. During these dropouts, GAMS is unable to

compute a heading solution and the controller Status pane indicates

Not ready in the GAMS field.

However, if a GAMS dropout occurs and persists without any

apparent antenna obstruction, one of the following problems may

exist:

• A loss of GNSS receiver configuration

• A failure in the GNSS antenna

• A failure in the GNSS antenna cable

• A failure in the GNSS receiver

The above diagnosis assumes that the PCS continues to receive

messages from the secondary GNSS receiver. Select View, GAMS

Solution to see the GAMS status.

GAMS Ambiguity Resolution Failures

If there is a GAMS ambiguity resolution failure, the controller Status

pane indicates Not ready in the GAMS field. The same status is

indicated when there is satellite signal loss due to an antenna

obstruction.

The POS MV Message Log window specifically indicates GAMS

ambiguity resolution failures; see Figure 56 on page 9-9.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-18

GAMS

Occasional failures of ambiguity resolution, for example at intervals of

10 to 20 minutes, are quite common and may be the result of changes

to the satellite constellation.

Repeated or continuous failures in ambiguity resolution may be the

result of a poor GAMS calibration or excessive vibration at the

antennas. These failures may also indicate weak signal reception

from the satellites, requiring changes to the installation.

Use the following steps to further diagnose the problem:

1. Select View, GNSS Data and examine the L1 Signal-To-Noise

Ratios (SNR) for the available satellites, see Figure 50 on page 8-

2. If the L1 SNR is below 38 dB for more than one satellite, the

GNSS antenna cables are introducing too much signal

attenuation. To correct this fault, shorten the cables or substitute

them with new low-loss cables.

2. Examine the antenna mountings; they must be rigid with respect

to each other and with respect to the IMU. Make any necessary

modifications to secure the antenna mounting positions so that

they experience no significant twisting or movement relative to the

IMU.

3. Repeat the GAMS calibration and ensure that:

• The Positional Dilution of Precision (PDOP) is below 2.5

(preferable below 2.0)

• The GAMS Solution window shows at least six Space

Vehicles (SVs) in the solution

Prior to the calibration, perform a series of calibration manoeuvres

and ensure the heading accuracy is better than 2.0°. Refer to the

Initial GNSS Configuration description on page 4-17 for the

instructions to complete this calibration procedure. Try to achieve

a heading accuracy better than 1.0°.

Within the first ten minutes after calibration, GAMS uses dynamic

inputs to verify the calibration. Therefore, once the calibration is

completed, perform a series of dynamic and vigorous

manoeuvres with the vessel for ten minutes to support this

process.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-19

GAMS

4. If the ambiguity resolution problem persists, contact Applanix for

further instructions. Refer to Technical Support and Service on

page A-1 for procedures.

Remove and Replace Procedures

The following paragraphs explain how to remove and replace the various components and subassemblies

of the POS MV system.

ELECTRICAL HAZARD

Note: these warnings apply only to POS MV V5 PCS.

Mains electrical voltages can cause death or serious injury by

electric shock.

Only a competent person who has received the relevant training

and experience should perform maintenance work on electrical

equipment.

Power-off and isolate the equipment from the electrical supply

before you work on any equipment that uses mains voltage.

Arrange to safely discharge any power supply storage

capacitors.

Observe all relevant local and national safety regulations while

performing any maintenance work on electrically powered

equipment.

After completing maintenance, refit all safety covers and ground

connections to the equipment.

The PCS employs double pole / neutral fusing on the power

receptacle. Each of the two RoHS compliant fuses are rated at:

• Rating = 250 V

• Current = 4 A

• Type = fast acting

• Case = 5.2 mm x 20 mm

Figure 57: PCS Front Panel - POS MV V5

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-20

Figure 58: PCS Rear Panel - POS MV V5

Figure 59: PCS Front Panel – POS MV V5-1

Figure 60: PCS Rear Panel – POS MV V5-1

Circular Connectors

The IMU connector on POS MV V5 and the majority of connectors on POS MV V5-1 are high quality,

IP67 Lemo ® connectors. These connectors use spring loaded latches that engage when the connector is

pushed fully into the socket. Once engaged the connector is very secure against shock, vibration and

pulling on the cable, ensuring a reliable connection. To disengage the connector you must pull back on

the outer release sleave. Since pulling back on the release sleave often results in some force on the

entire connector body the latches can experience some friction and not retract smoothly. If possible it is

better to hold the cable forward while pulling back on the release sleave and then sliding the connector

out of the socket. Applying excess force could damage the latch mechanism.

Inertial Measurement Unit

The IMU contains sensitive and expensive solid-state

accelerometer and gyro components. Permanent damage to

these components will result if handled roughly. To prevent

irreversible damage, handle the IMU with care.

If you suspect a fault condition with the IMU please return it to Applanix for service and repair. To remove

or replace the IMU complete this procedure.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-21

Tools

• Set of metric open-end or combination wrenches appropriate to remove or secure IMU to its

mounting location

Remove

1. Observe PCS front panel power-off procedures (starting on page 4-24).

2. Remove power cable from PCS rear panel (starting page 9-20).

3. Release and disconnect power and data cable from IMU. Protect free end of power and data

cable from damage or contamination.

4. If fault suspected on power and data cable, disconnect and install a new one. Refer to IMU Cable

procedure on page 9-23 for details.

5. Release IMU from installed position noting orientation. Retain fixing screws or bolts.

6. Handle IMU with care and pack into original transit case.

Note: It is imperative that proper packing is used to transport IMU.

7. Contact Applanix Customer Support for shipping instructions; refer to page A-1.

Replace

Note: Each IMU is designed with alignment holes to ensure consistency in the physical mounting of

the IMU (within certain tolerances); refer to Figure 5 on page 2-8. The internal accelometers and

gyros have tolerances that affect the overall alignment. Any time a repaired or new IMU is installed

the calibration procedure, starting on page 2-24, should be followed. Contact Applanix Customer

Support for additional information, refer to page A-1 for instructions.

1. Same location:

a) Place IMU in installed position noting orientation. Secure fixing screws or bolts.

b) Connect power and data cable to IMU. Protect free end of power and data cable from

damage or contamination.

c) Replace power cable to PCS rear panel (starting page 9-20).

d) Observe PCS front panel power-on procedures (starting on page 4-1).

2. New location - Follow installation instructions for Inertial Measurement Unit starting on page 2-7.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-22

GNSS Antenna

Do not place metallized labels on the radome. Signal

attenuation will result.

If you suspect a fault condition on the GNSS antenna, replace it with the same type and ensure its

serviceability. To remove or replace the GNSS antenna complete this procedure.

Tools

• Self-amalgamating tape

• Waterproof spray

• Sharp knife or scalpel

• Set of SAE open-end or combination wrenches appropriate to remove or secure GNSS antenna

Remove

1. Observe PCS front panel power-off procedures (starting on page 4-24).

2. Remove power cable from PCS rear panel (starting page 9-20).

3. Remove waterproof sealing tape or silicone sealant protecting TNC antenna connector.

4. Disconnect TNC antenna connector. Protect free end of cable from damage or contamination.

5. Note direction of arrow on top of antenna dome.

6. Remove antenna by turning in a counter-clockwise direction.

Replace

1. Same location:

a) Install antenna by turning in a clockwise direction.

b) Note direction of arrow on top of antenna dome and align with previous installation.

c) Connect TNC antenna connector. Protect free end of cable from damage or contamination.

d) Apply waterproof sealing tape or silicone sealant to protect TNC antenna connector.

e) Replace power cable to PCS rear panel (starting page 9-20).

f) Observe PCS front panel power-on procedures (starting on page 4-1).

2. New location - Follow installation instructions for GNSS System on page 2-4.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-23

IMU Cable

If you suspect a fault condition on the IMU power and data cable, install a new cable. To remove or

replace the IMU power and data cable, complete this procedure.

Tools

No tools are required.

Remove

1. Observe PCS front panel power-off procedures (starting on page 4-24).

2. Remove power cable from PCS rear panel (starting page 9-20).

3. Disconnect IMU power and data cable at both IMU and PCS (Figure 96 on page E-9).

4. Inspect cable and connectors for signs of damage or contamination. Perform repairs to cable as

necessary. Protect free ends of cable from damage or contamination.

5. Replace cable if not repairable.

Replace

1. Connect IMU power and data cable at both IMU and PCS (Figure 96 on page E-9). Protect free

ends of cable from damage or contamination.

2. Replace power cable to PCS rear panel (starting page 9-20).

3. Observe PCS front panel power-on procedures (starting on page 4-1).

GNSS Antenna Cable

If you suspect a fault condition on the GNSS antenna power and data cable, install a new cable. To

remove or replace the GNSS antenna power and data cable complete this procedure.

Tools

• Self-amalgamating tape

• Waterproof spray

• Sharp knife or scalpel

• Slip joint pliers appropriate to remove or secure the GNSS antenna connector

Remove

1. Observe PCS front panel power-off procedures (starting on page 4-24).

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-24

2. Remove power cable from PCS rear panel (starting page 9-20).

3. Remove waterproof sealing tape or silicone sealant protecting TNC antenna connector.

4. Disconnect GNSS antenna power and data cable at both GNSS and PCS (Figure 96 on page E-

9).

5. Inspect cable and connectors for signs of damage or contamination. Perform repairs to cable as

necessary. Protect free ends of cable from damage or contamination.

6. Replace cable if not repairable.

Replace

1. Connect GNSS antenna power and data cable at both GNSS and PCS (Figure 96 on page E-9).

Do not over tighten. Protect free ends of cable from damage or contamination.

2. Apply waterproof sealing tape or silicone sealant to protect TNC antenna connector.

3. Replace power cable to PCS rear panel (starting page 9-20).

4. Observe PCS front panel power-on procedures (starting on page 4-1).

POS Computer System

There are no user replaceable parts inside. Service shall be

performed by trained and qualified personnel. If you suspect a

fault condition with the PCS contact Applanix Customer

Support, refer to page A-1 for instructions.

To remove or replace the PCS complete this procedure.

Tools

• Cross tipped screwdrivers

• Straight tipped screwdriver

• Set of SAE or metric open-end or combination wrenches appropriate to remove or secure the

PCS to its mounting location

Remove

1. Observe PCS front panel power-off procedures (starting on page 4-24).

2. Remove power cable from PCS rear panel (starting page 9-20).

3. Remove PCS from mounting location.

4. Tag and remove PCS rear panel connectors.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-25

Replace

1. Same location:

a) Install PCS rear panel connectors.

b) Install PCS in mounting location.

c) Replace power cable to PCS rear panel (starting page 9-20).

d) Observe PCS front panel power-on procedures (starting on page 4-1).

2. New location - Follow installation instructions for POS MV V5-1 on page 2-12 and POS MV V5 on

page 2-9.

Troubleshooting

Note: If the POS MV system fails to operate when you first try to use it after installation, check that you

have installed and configured the system correctly. Contact Applanix for advice if necessary, refer to

Technical Support and Service on page A-1 for procedures.

Refer to this subsection if the system develops a fault after a period of normal and successful operation,

or if you experience some problems during the initial integration of POS MV into the survey suite.

The following subsections cover six categories of system failure:

• Total system failure

• Initialization failure

• GNSS Not Available

• GAMS Not Ready

• Serial communications problem

• Ethernet communications problem

Total System Failure

A total system failure is indicated by the following symptoms:

• Real-time and NMEA data communication stops

• Ethernet LAN communication stops

Use the following procedure to diagnose and isolate a total system failure:

1. Power-off PCS. Wait for thirty seconds and then power-on PCS again to reboot the system. If

failure symptoms persist, continue with procedure.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-26

2. Check IMU light, it should be solid green. If not, there is problem with IMU subsystem. Refer to

Fault Identification subsection on page 9-3 for further IMU diagnostic advice.

3. Check SYS light, if red there may be a software problem. If Ethernet is functioning, select

Diagnostics, Other from the controller menu bar, see Figure 61. Record any dead tasks and

inform Applanix.

Figure 61: POSView Other Diagnostic

4. Check quality of electrical power supplied to PCS.

5. Check PCS connection to ground through ground strap to grounding screw or stud on PCS rear

panel.

6. If failure still exists, system may have experienced a board failure. Substitute working PCS for

failed unit.

Return the failed PCS to Applanix for repair. Provide a report of your findings with the returned PCS,

refer to Technical Support and Service on page A-1.

Initialization Failure

The system Initialization procedure requires POS MV to compute the approximate tilt of the IMU relative

to a locally level reference, taking into account the present position. This is called coarse levelling. If POS

MV fails to complete its coarse levelling procedure, the most likely cause is the lack of GNSS aiding data.

If the system fails to complete coarse levelling, follow the instructions below to isolate the problem:

1. Check Nav Status on controller main window.

2. If Nav Status shows DR (Dead Reckoning), select View, GNSS Data from the controller menu

bar, see Figure 62. If Receiver Status Mode indicates No Nav Data follow GNSS Not Available

procedure starting on page 9-27.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-27

Figure 62: POSView GNSS Data - Receiver Status Pane

3. Check IMU Status on controller main window. If IMU Status shows Failure or Warning, power-

off system and contact Applanix for instructions to return IMU for repair.

4. If IMU Status shows OK, check IMU base plate is mounted in nominal horizontal orientation. If

necessary, adjust installation to make base plate of IMU as close to horizontal as possible.

5. If problem still exists, contact Applanix for instructions to return POS MV system for evaluation

and repair.

GNSS Not Available

When the POS MV system is powered-on, the GNSS receivers require approximately two minutes to

acquire satellites and to begin computing a navigation solution. During this time, the Nav Status display

on the controller main window shows DR.

If this status does not change after several minutes, or if the status changes from a valid mode to DR and

remains unavailable, there is likely a problem with the GNSS subsystem.

There are two classes of GNSS problems associated with the POS MV:

a) A communication fault between the receiver and the PCS

b) The receivers are not tracking a sufficient number of satellites

Improper Communication

Note: The GNSS lights are controlled by the navigation software; the system must be in the navigate

mode for the proper indication of the GNSS lights.

Follow the instructions below to identify a communications fault:

1. Examine GNSS light on PCS front panel:

• If light shows red, there is no communication between PCS and GNSS receiver. Follow

instructions relating to loss of GNSS communications in Status Warning Messages on

page 9-14 and the following step below.

• If light shows amber or green, select View, GNSS Data from controller menu bar; see

Figure 50 on page 8-2.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-28

• If GNSS Data window shows system is tracking fewer than four satellites, go to

Insufficient Satellites on page 9-28.

2. Select Diagnostics, Primary GNSS from controller menu bar and check that messages are

being received, see Figure 63. If no, fault may be in GNSS receiver or in communications

between GNSS and PCS. Please contact Applanix Customer Support, see page A-1.

Figure 63: POSView Primary GNSS Diagnostics

Insufficient Satellites

Follow the instructions below to identify a problem caused by insufficient satellite signals:

1. From controller main window select View, GAMS Solution and note how many satellites appear

in SVs in Solution field, see Figure 64.

2. If SVs in Solution field has fewer than four satellites, mounting

location for GNSS antennas may be cause. Ensure mounting position of antennas provides

unobstructed view of sky in all directions. If either antenna is moved, refer to Installation section

starting on page 2-1 and System Configuration description starting on page 4-1 for instructions.

Figure 64 GAMS Solution Status Window

3. If mounting locations for both GNSS antennas are optimal and DR status persists, move vessel to

area that has better satellite visibility.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-29

4. If the problem persists after moving the vessel, a problem may exist with the GNSS receiver card,

antenna cable or connections. Examine cable and connections for damage, degradation or

contamination, e.g. moisture ingress. Use low-loss cable to replace defective cables. Ensure

cable connectors are waterproofed.

5. If problem persists, contact Applanix for advice.

GAMS Not Ready

After the POS MV system is installed, the GNSS Azimuth Measurement Subsystem (GAMS) requires

calibration. Refer to the Initial GNSS Configuration description starting on page 4-17 for instructions.

Once GAMS is calibrated, it will initialize itself and deliver heading measurements automatically each time

the system is powered-on and enters the navigate mode. Depending on the availability of satellites, the

GAMS Initialization process may take up to five minutes.

If there is a temporary loss of satellites, e.g. caused by a signal obstruction, the GAMS Status may show

Not Ready for brief periods. However, if GAMS Status shows Not Ready for an extended period after

power-on, or if it transitions from Online to Not Ready and remains there, take the following steps to

determine the cause.

1. Select View, GAMS Solution from controller menu bar. In GAMS Solution window, check

number of SVs tracked and value displayed for PDOP. GAMS must track five SVs minimum and

have PDOP value <3 before it can solve ambiguities. Wait for satellite constellation to improve or

move to a location that has better satellite visibility.

2. If number of SVs tracked does not increase or if PDOP remains too high, problem may be GNSS

antenna installation. Examine GNSS antennas, cables and connectors for damage or

degradation.

3. GAMS may experience problems caused by invalid calibration or excessive vibration in the

antennas. Check antenna installation and ensure antennas are rigid relative to each other and

relative to IMU.

Serial Communications Problem

A serial communications problem may occur on any of the user configurable COM ports. Use the

following steps to determine the nature of the problem.

1. Select Settings, Input/Output Ports from controller menu bar. Verify parameter settings; see

Figure 65 and the COM Ports description starting on page 3-1.

2. Verify serial port connection.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-30

Figure 65: POSView Input/Output Port Setup

Note: Dynamically configurable COM ports add great flexibility, but can also cause problems if

inadvertently reassigned.

To check the output functions (NMEA and Binary) perform the following steps:

1. Ensure that POS is navigating and is in Degraded Nav mode or better. Binary data is not output

until this mode is reached.

2. Select Diagnostics, NMEA & Binary Output from controller menu bar. Verify displayed Port#

matches selected COM port (e.g. Port# 1 = COM 1), see Figure 66.

3. Check Write Failure field. If value increases, indicates PCS hardware interface problem; try

another COM port. Reassign NMEA or Binary output to unused COM port. If communications

restored, note defective COM port for future reference.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-31

Figure 66: POSView NMEA & Binary Output Diagnostic

4. Check that baud rate is sufficient to transmit data selected.

5. Check serial cable integrity.

6. Disconnect remote end of cable from sonar or other receiving equipment and connect cable to

PC running serial program (e.g. ProComm or Hyper Terminal). Adjust baud and protocol to match

PCS output settings. If data received from POS, problem is receiving equipment.

To check the input functions (Base GNSS and Auxiliary GNSS) perform the following steps:

1. Select Diagnostics, Base GNSS, Base 1 or 2, or Diagnostics, Aux GNSS from controller menu

bar, see Figure 67.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-32

2. Check Bytes Received field. If no bytes received,

may indicate PCS hardware interface problem; try

another COM port. Reassign Base or Aux GNSS

input to unused COM port. If communications

restored, note defective COM port for future

reference.

3. Check serial cable integrity.

4. Disconnect PCS end of serial cable and connect to

PC running a serial program (e.g. ProComm or Hyper

Terminal). Adjust baud and protocol to match Base

GNSS or Aux GNSS output settings. If data received

from GNSS, problem is PCS.

Ethernet Communications Problem

Loss of Ethernet communications will result in the loss of

communications between the PCS and the controlling PC.

The MV-POSView Controller program indicates this by

displaying an appropriate error message. Figures 68 and 69

provide troubleshooting procedures to identify the causes of

Ethernet communications failures.

Figure 67: POSView Base 1 Diagnostic

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-33

Ethernet

Communications

Failure

(Broadcast)

Check SYSTEM

LED on PCS front

panel

SYSTEM LED

red? Reboot the PCS

YSYSTEM LED

red?

Refer to Total

System Failure

procedure

PCS on

multinode

network?

Disconnect PCS

and PC from

network

PC to PCS

comms OK?

Check network cables

and integrity

Establish stand

alone connection

between PC and

PCS

Check

communication

between PC and

PCS

Figure 68: (1 of 2) Ethernet Communications Failure

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Fault Identification

9-34

Check LAN Tx LED

LAN Tx LED

flashes?

Reboot PC and

restart Controller

program

Check

communication

between PC and

PCS

Check Ethernet

cable and

connectors

Cable OK?

Problem with TCP

drivers or Ethernet

adapter in PC

Replace Ethernet

cable

Reboot the PCS

Check LAN Tx LED

PC to PCS

comms OK?

Intermittent failure,

log for future

reference

LAN Tx LED flashes

Reconnect PCS and

PC to network

Swap GPS

receivers and

change PCS

Reboot the PCS

PC to PCS

comms OK?

System working, re-

install and initialize

parameters

Contact Applanix

Figure 69: (2 of 2) Ethernet Communications Failure

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Technical Support and Service

A-1

Appendix A Technical Support and Service

Contact Applanix

Applanix Corporation

85 Leek Crescent

Richmond Hill, ON

L4B 3B3

Canada

Applanix LLC

17461 Village Green Drive

Houston, TX 77040

USA

Applanix Corporation

Forester’s House

Old Racecourse

Oswestry, SY10 7PW

Tel: +1 (289) 695-6000

Fax: +1 (905) 709-6027

Appendix A Tel:

+1 (713) 896-9900

Fax: +1 (713) 896-9919

Tel: +44 (1691) 659359

Fax: +44 (1691) 659299

Web site: http://www.applanix.com

How to Reach Customer Support

For technical support on POS regarding installation or operation, contact Applanix customer support at

the numbers listed on our website. On the home page, select Support. If voice communication is

required, select the Contact Support link. For general inquiries, please visit our website or call +1 (289)

695-6000.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Technical Support and Service

A-2

Returns

In the event that it becomes necessary to return any component of the POS MV system for repair, please

follow the procedure below.

1. Call your Applanix Customer Support Representative and request a Return Material Authorization

(RMA) number and shipping instructions or obtain an RMA number via our website.

2. Carefully disconnect and remove the part(s) to be returned.

3. Pack the part(s) to be returned in their original packing containers. Applanix will not be

responsible for damage to parts during shipment, if returned in any container other than the

original shipping cases. New cases are available - please contact your Customer Support

Representative for details.

4. Address shipping cartons to the address listed on the packing list shipped with the system.

Please DO NOT ship any POS components to Applanix without an RMA number.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-1

Appendix B Theory of Operation

This appendix provides a simplified explanation of the POS MV theory of operation. The explanation

includes some details on each of the main techniques that the system uses to compute an integrated

navigation solution.

Inertial Navigation:

An introduction to the theory of inertial navigation.

Heave Filter:

You can tune the characteristics of the heave filter

to provide optimal performance of POS MV

through a wide range of dynamic conditions.

GNSS Azimuth

Measurement Subsystem:

GAMS uses information from two GNSS receivers

to improve the accuracy of heading measurement.

Heading Measurements:

The unaided system can deliver heading

measurements with reduced accuracy.

Baselines:

An explanation of the baseline definitions used

throughout this appendix.

Baseline Measurement:

How the system measures the baseline vectors of

the GNSS antennas and the IMU.

Carrier Phase Differential

Position:

A simplified description of the process by which

POS MV measures the difference in position

between the two GNSS antennas.

Alignment:

How POS MV levels itself and aligns with true

north in an unaided condition.

Error Sources:

How the position measurements of a free inertial

navigation system would degrade with time

caused by unavoidable errors in the sensing

subsystems.

Aided Inertial Navigation:

POS MV uses a Kalman Filter to compensate for

the effects of errors to deliver a blended navigation

solution that maintains a high degree of accuracy.

Inertial Navigation

An Inertial Navigation System (INS) computes its position on the Earth by a sophisticated form of dead

reckoning. In its simplest form, dead reckoning estimates the current position by measuring the speed,

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-2

direction and time of travel from a known starting point. The errors inherent in this form of navigation arise

from two sources:

• Uncertainty in determining the position of the starting point. This contributes a fixed error in the

dead reckoning position. The magnitude of this error is the same as the error in determining the

position of the starting point.

• Inevitable inaccuracies in the measurement of speed and heading. Errors in the dead reckoning

position will increase with time as the effects of these inaccuracies accumulate.

Dead reckoning requires no external support from radio navigation aids. It can be reasonably accurate if

the system compensates for errors in the measurement of speed and heading, and for the effects of wind,

tide and current.

To implement dead reckoning an INS contains sensitive components that include:

• Accelerometers to sense the specific forces of gravity, plus the forces that accelerate the INS with

respect to the Earth.

• Gyros to sense all angular rates of rotation experienced by the INS with respect to an inertial

frame of reference.

From the inertial measurements delivered by these components the INS solves Newton’s equations of

angular and translational motion on the approximately spherical surface of the Earth, and computes a full

range of motion parameters:

• The orientation of the IMU (roll and pitch) with respect to a locally level reference plane.

• The heading of the IMU with respect to geographical north.

• The latitude, longitude and altitude of the IMU on the surface of the Earth.

In addition to these, appropriate calculations will also deliver measurements of velocity and track over the

ground.

How INS Navigates

The accelerometers and gyros sense specific forces and angular rates relative to an inertial frame of

reference. An inertial frame of reference is one that experiences no accelerations or angular rates of its

own. Therefore, in such a reference frame, Newton’s laws of motion apply without requiring corrections

for accelerations or rotations of the frame.

Navigation on the Earth introduces forces and angular rates due to gravity and the rotation of the Earth.

The accelerometers and gyros will sense these forces and movements, even when the INS is stationary

relative to the Earth: Any object on the surface of the Earth experiences the force due to gravity. It also

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-3

has an angular rate with respect to the inertial frame of reference frame because the Earth rotates about

is north-south axis at 15°/hour.

An INS that is designed to operate on the surface of the Earth must first subtract the gravitational force

and Coriolis acceleration from the sensed specific forces, to obtain the acceleration of the INS with

respect to the Earth.

• Gravitational acceleration - Essentially a constant over the surface of the Earth (although small

variations exist from one place to another). The standard acceleration of gravity

80665.9 msg

. The convention used throughout this manual defines gravitational acceleration

81.9g

• Coriolis acceleration - The apparent tendency of a freely moving body to swing to one side when

its motion is referred to a set of axis that is itself rotating in space. The magnitude of Coriolis

acceleration measured by an INS moving horizontally on the surface of the Earth is:





sin2c



Where:



is the angular magnitude of the angular

velocity of rotation of the Earth



is the speed of the INS



is the latitude

The acceleration is perpendicular to the direction of



and is towards the right in the Northern

Hemisphere.

The INS must also subtract the 15°/hour Earth rotation rate from the sensed angular rates to obtain the

angular rate of the INS relative to the Earth.

After it has performed these functions, the INS integrates the corrected accelerations and angular rates to

compute changes in velocity, position, attitude and heading relative to the Earth.

Figure 70 on page B-5 is a simplified view of inertial navigation on a spherical non-rotating Earth. The

vessel is moving north at an initial velocity



The INS housing and its internal accelerometers are fixed to the vessel, forming a ‘strap-down’

arrangement. One accelerometer aligns with the fore-aft line of the vessel, another aligns with the vertical

and a third accelerometer aligns with the port-starboard axis of the vessel. For convenience, this

explanation considers only the fore-aft and the vertical accelerometers (although the INS uses all three to

compute the solution).

With the vessel on a northerly course as shown, the fore-aft accelerometer also aligns with true north and

therefore senses any change in the northerly velocity.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-4

Similarly, as the vessel heaves, the vertical accelerometer senses the specific force:



down down g



Where:

down



is the vertical motion

is the steady state acceleration due to

gravity

This is the varying vertical acceleration experienced by the vessel caused by vertical motion, added to the

steady state acceleration due to gravity.

As the vessel moves northwards, the gyro aligned with the lateral axis senses two rotations:

1. The varying short-term rotations about the pitch axis as the bow pitches up and down with the

dynamic action of the vessel.

2. A slow rotation about the pitch axis as the vessel translates towards latitudes that are more

northerly. This slow rotation is called the transport rate and can be determined by:

north

east







Where:

east



the transport rate about the eastward

axis of the INS platform

north



the northerly velocity of the vessel

the radius of the Earth

This is the negative of the rate at which latitude changes. Consequently, if the INS knows the starting

latitude, it can compute the current latitude of the vessel as follows:





eaststart

--

Where:

east



the transport rate about the eastward

axis of the INS platform

start

the starting latitude

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-5

Figure 70: Example of INS Navigation on a Spherical Earth

In Figure 70, the vessel that supports the INS has no applied angles of roll or pitch, and moves along a

fixed northerly heading.

Ideally, the INS platform defines a navigation frame that is both locally stable and locally level:

• A locally stable reference frame always maintains a constant orientation relative to the surface of

the Earth at its current position.

• A locally level reference frame is always level relative to the surface of the Earth at its current

position.

In Figure 70, the navigation frame of the vessel coincides with the geographic frame of reference.

Inertial Navigation Frames of Reference

This appendix refers to a number of different frames of reference:

• Inertial frame

• Earth frame

• Geographic navigation frame

• Body frame

• IMU body frame

For clarity, the following subsections define each of these reference frames as they apply throughout this

appendix.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-6

Inertial Frame

The inertial frame of reference is a Newtonian reference frame that experiences zero specific force

and angular rate of its own. It is an absolute frame of reference and has a fixed, convenient

orientation in space.

Earth Frame

The Earth co-ordinate frame is fixed to the Earth with its axis arranged as follows:

• The x-axis coincides with the axis of Earth rotation.

• The z-axis is in the equatorial plane at zero longitude (on the Greenwich meridian).

• The y-axis completes the right-handed orthogonal frame.

Note: This definition of the Earth frame differs from the WGS-84 definition in which the z-axis

coincides with the Earth rotation axis and the x-axis coincides with the intersection of the Greenwich

meridian and the equator.

The Earth frame rotates relative to the inertial frame at a nominal 15°/hr (or, more accurately,

15.04107°/hr).

Geographic Navigation Frame

The geographic navigation frame is a locally level frame of reference. The north and east axis are

tangential to the Earth surface at the current latitude and longitude, and are defined by the north and

east directions respectively.

The third axis of the geographic navigation frame is the down axis and is a local vertical that passes

through the centre of the Earth.

Body Frame

The body frame is a co-ordinate frame fixed to the vessel with its axis arranged as follows:

• The x-axis coincides with the surveyed fore-aft line of the vessel.

• The y-axis is perpendicular to the x-axis and coincides with the port-starboard line of the

vessel.

• The z-axis is perpendicular to both the x- and the y-axis and coincides with the surveyed

vertical of the vessel.

IMU Body Frame

The IMU body frame uses the right-handed orthogonal co-ordinate system with its origin at the

sensing centre of the IMU. These axis are fixed relative to the IMU and are marked by a label on the

IMU housing.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-7

INS Platform

An INS platform is one that has its accelerometers mounted on a mechanically gimballed platform. The

platform is stabilized so that it always remains level relative to the local geographic navigation frame.

Note: POS MV does not use a mechanically stabilized platform of the type described in this subsection.

This explanation is included because it may be easier to visualise an inertial navigation system based on

a mechanical platform than one based on a strap-down INS arrangement.

Note: POS MV uses a strap-down INS of the type described in Strap-Down INS on page B-8.

Figure 71 on page B-7 represents a simplified INS platform suspended by three gimbals. The platform

defines a locally level navigation frame as long as it maintains a level orientation with respect to the

surface of the Earth, in spite of any motion applied externally.

Feedback systems and a servomechanism maintain platform stability in each axis of suspension:

• An arrangement of three gyros senses any angular rate of motion of the platform about each axis.

The arrangement places each of the gyros orthogonally so that each responds to rotations in one

axis only.

G=Gyro

A=Accelerometer

X-axis

Y-axis

Z-axis Z-axis

Y-axis

X-axis

Outer gimbal

Middle gimbal

Inner gimbal

Angular resolver

Figure 71: Gimballed INS Platform Structure

• A servomotor in each axis receives the amplified signals from its complementary gyro and rotates

the gimbals axis to correct for the measured rate of rotation. In an ideally configured and

compensated INS platform, the net angular rotation of the platform is almost entirely removed.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-8

This action gives the platform stability in the inertial reference frame. In this condition, to an

observer on the surface of the Earth the platform would appear to rotate at the Earth rate of

15°/hour relative to a locally level navigation frame.

To remove this apparent rotation, the control system makes the platform locally level by adding to

the respective feedback signals, reference signals that cause the three gimbals axis to rotate at

the Earth rate plus the transport rate.

• With the INS housing fixed to the vessel and the platform north aligned and locally level, the INS

can measure the roll, pitch and heading of the vessel directly from the gimbals angles of the INS

platform. It takes these measurements from angular resolvers in each gimbals axis.

The accelerometers are also mounted orthogonally on the platform to sense accelerations in the

x, y and z directions relative to the surface of the Earth. When the platform is aligned and level

with respect to the Earth surface, its x-axis points in a known direction, usually towards true north.

With the platform aligned and maintained locally both stable and level, the accelerometers align

to a geographic navigation frame. In this orientation, the accelerometer array measures specific

forces that the INS experiences relative to the inertial reference frame, and resolves them in the

geographic navigation frame.

From these measurements, the INS computes its accelerations with respect to the surface of the

Earth, also resolved in the geographic navigation frame. The INS integrates these accelerations

in the navigation frame to obtain velocity and changes in position.

Strap-Down INS

A strap-down INS has its rate gyros and accelerometers fixed to the INS or IMU housing. This housing is

fixed to the vessel. The inertial sensor array therefore moves and rotates with the vessel. This is the

inertial navigator mechanization used by POS MV.

The accelerometers sense specific forces with respect to the inertial frame. These are resolved in the IMU

body frame defined by the orthogonal accelerometer and gyro arrangement.

Similarly, the gyros sense all angular rates with respect to the inertial frame. These too are resolved in the

inertial sensor frame.

The INS uses the sensed angular rates, the computed Earth rate and transport rates to update a

Direction Cosine Matrix (DCM), which describes the mathematical transformation from the IMU body

frame to a mathematically defined geographic navigation frame.

Following transformation of the measured specific forces into the geographic navigation frame, the

navigation computations are the same as those for the INS platform.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-9

The navigation platform, though not a physical entity as was the gimballed platform, exists in the

navigation computer as an IMU-to-navigation frame DCM. For this reason, the geographic navigation

frame is sometimes called the mathematical platform.

Figure 72 shows the functional architecture of a strap-down INS. The arrangement contains an inertial

sensor assembly comprising a triad of accelerometers and a triad of gyros. Each of the three orthogonal

axis of the IMU body frame includes one accelerometer and one gyro.

The inertial sensor processor collects the digitised accelerations and angular rates from the inertial

sensor assembly and compensates these for temperature-dependent sensor errors.

Together, the inertial sensor assembly and the inertial sensor processor comprise the Inertial

Measurement Unit (IMU). In POS MV, the IMU is a separate self-contained unit that interfaces to the PCS

through a data interface cable.

Inertial Sensor

Assembly Inertial Sensor

Temperatures

Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU)

Navigation Solution

Gyros

Accelerometers

Inertial Sensor

Processor

Navigation and Alignment

Processor

Alignment

Algorithm

Strapdown

Navigator

zyx ,,





zyx ,,





zyVx ,,

Figure 72: Strap-Down INS Generic Architecture

The compensated inertial measurements pass to the navigation and alignment processor, which

implements the alignment algorithm and computes the INS navigation solution.

The alignment algorithm initializes the navigation equations, implements levelling and gyrocompassing,

and obtains a mathematical platform alignment.

In POS MV, the navigation and alignment processor is located inside the PCS.

The strap-down INS ‘navigates’ the inertial sensors and computes the roll, pitch and heading angles of

the inertial sensor assembly relative to the geographic navigation frame.

Generally, the housing of the INS (the IMU in POS MV) is assumed to be aligned with the inertial sensor

frame. With the inertial sensor installed so that its x, y and z axis coincide with the forward, starboard and

down directions of the vessel hull respectively, the INS will measure the vessel roll, pitch and heading

directly. Otherwise, the INS must apply a constant installation offset transformation to the computed roll,

pitch and heading to transform the inertial sensor assembly attitude to the hull attitude.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-10

POS MV includes a user orientation input capability. This makes it possible to correct the orientation of

the IMU so that it delivers measurements valid for an alternative reference frame, such as that of a

multibeam transducer or of the vessel.

The small size and lightweight of the IMU allow it to be mounted directly on the multibeam transducer.

From here, it can measure the transducer position and orientation directly.

Heave Filter

POS MV measures heave by performing a double integration on the measurements of vertical

acceleration computed by the strap-down navigator, see Figure 73.

The high pass filter limits the appearance of noise in the vertical measurement channel caused by the

strap-down navigator. Sources of such noise could include Schuler oscillations, GNSS noise, etc.

The performance characteristics of the heave filter are:

• Filter settling time

• Steady state heave error

Filter settling time describes the time required for a transient in the heave filter to settle to a negligible

level. The filter has a transient behaviour that is stimulated by sudden changes in the filter input. This

occurs when you power-on POS MV and when the vessel experiences abrupt changes in vertical

displacement.

Information from

POS MV Strapdown

Navigator

Heave Estimate

First Integration

Second

Integration

High Pass Filter

Vertical Acceleration

Vertical Velocity

Vertical Displacement

Figure 73: Heave Filter Architecture

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-11

Abrupt changes of this type can occur if the vessel experiences induced heave because of speed

changes. Lighter vessels respond rapidly to changes in engine throttle settings and are therefore more

likely to experience abrupt induced heave. Conversely, larger vessels that have a heavier displacement

are not so responsive to changes in engine throttle settings and tend to exhibit a reduced tendency

towards induced heave.

If the IMU is located close to the bow of the vessel then a significant induced heave can occur as the

vessel climbs its own bow wave and pitches upwards.

Steady state heave error describes the error in measured heave after the filter transients have decayed.

This error can be characterized as follows for an approximately sinusoidal heave motion with magnitude

A and frequency ω:

Steady state heave error =

Where:



the gain error introduced by the heave

filter



the phase error introduced by the heave

filter

Steady state heave error becomes greater at lower heave frequencies in the frequency band of interest.

The high pass component of the heave filter is characterized by the following parameters, both of which

are configurable through the MV-POSView Controller program:

• Heave bandwidth

• Damping ratio

The corner frequency is the lower (band reject) cut-off frequency of the high pass filter. Its setting should

be at least one decade below the lowest heave frequency of interest. For example, if you require a heave

measurement bandwidth of 0.05 Hz (for heave periods up to 20 seconds), then you should set the heave

bandwidth to 20 seconds, and thus the corner frequency will be 0.005 Hz or lower (a heave period of 200

seconds or longer).

The damping ratio defines the transient characteristics of the heave filter and affects the steady state

heave error. The largest recommended value for the damping ratio is 0.707, which causes the heave filter

to be ‘critically damped’. In general, this setting provides the shortest settling time among the available

damping ratios for a fixed corner frequency. A smaller damping ratio causes the filter transient response

to exhibit a decaying sinusoidal behaviour whose settling time is longer than the critically damped settling

time.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-12

Default Heave Filter Parameters

The default heave filter parameters are:

• Heave bandwidth = 20 seconds

• Heave damping ratio = 0.707 (critically damped)

These default values give the best compromise between settling time and steady state heave error for a

vessel performing multibeam surveys in sea conditions up to sea state five.

On a different class of vessel in a different sea state, a different combination of heave filter parameters

may provide better results. The following guidelines assist in selecting appropriate heave filter

parameters.

Guidelines for Setting Heave Filter Parameters

The best combination of heave filter parameters will depend on the following factors:

• Survey conditions - how often does the survey vessel change speed or direction?

• The dynamic characteristics of the survey vessel, in particular the induced heave following

changes to engine throttle settings.

• Significant heave amplitudes caused by the response of the survey vessel to the sea state.

You can determine empirically the correct combination of parameters for a particular survey vessel during

trials. The following are guidelines for selecting appropriate values:

1. Select heave filter parameters according to the following criteria:

• Heave bandwidth - equal to or greater than the longest heave period

• Heave damping ratio - in the range 0.45 to 0.71

2. Calculate the maximum allowable steady state percentage error as follows:

Maximum percentage error =

Maximum heave error

Significant heave amplitude

Choose a heave bandwidth and damping ratio to achieve the required maximum percentage error

with the shortest settling time.

Usually, the maximum heave error is comparable with the resolution of the bathymetric sonar that

requires heave compensation. The significant amplitude will change from one day to the next with

sea state and, therefore, so will the maximum percentage error.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-13

For example, if the heave error should be no more than 10 cm (comparable with the bathymetric

sonar resolution), and the significant heave amplitude is 0.5 metres on a given day, then the

maximum percentage error for that day is 20%.

3. A vessel that has a large displacement will usually exhibit more gradual changes of speed than

one that has a small displacement. Since the dynamics of a large vessel will not significantly

excite the transient behaviour of the filter, configure the heave filter to achieve a small percentage

steady state error at the expense of a long settling time.

Table 38 describes the variations of steady state heave error and settling time with changes in damping

ratio and bandwidth. Figure 74 through Figure 77 on pages B-14 through B-17 respectively show plots of

steady state heave error and transient behaviour for different combinations of heave filter parameters.

Table 38: Effects of Modifying Heave Filter Parameters

Heave Filter Tuning

Steady State

Error

Settling Time

Damping ratio

Increase

Decrease

Increase

Heave bandwidth

Increase

Decrease

Increase

Decrease

Increase

Decrease

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-14

Figure 74 shows a plot of the steady state heave error as a percentage of heave amplitude against heave

frequency for four heave bandwidths at the default damping ratio of 0.707.

Figure 74: Percentage Steady State Error with Heave Bandwidth

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-15

Figure 75 shows a plot of steady state heave error as a percentage of heave amplitude against heave

frequency for four damping ratios at the default corner heave bandwidth of 20 seconds.

Figure 75: Percentage Steady State Error with Damping Ratio

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-16

Figure 76 shows a plot of the heave filter response against time for four heave bandwidths at the default

damping ratio 0.707. The filter settling time is for the impulse response to settle to 20% of the impulse

magnitude.

Figure 76: Heave Filter Transient Behaviour with Heave Bandwidth

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-17

Figure 77 shows a plot of the heave filter response against time for four damping ratios at the default

heave bandwidth of 20 seconds. The filter settling time is for the impulse response to settle to 20% of the

impulse magnitude.

Figure 77: Heave Filter Transient Behaviour with Damping Ratio

GNSS Azimuth Measurement Subsystem

POS MV delivers heading measurements with an optimal accuracy of ±0.02°. It does this by using two

distinct and independent methods:

1. Dynamic Heading Alignment - A method that uses data supplied by the IMU and GNSS receivers

to achieve a heading that is, at best, accurate to within 0.35°.

Dynamic heading alignment delivers its best performance when the measurement unit

experiences rapid changes of direction and varying forces of acceleration. Drift will begin to

appear in the heading measurements when these dynamic manoeuvres cease and the vessel

follows a steady course and speed.

2. GNSS Azimuth Measurement Subsystem (GAMS) - A system that determines the geographic

vector between two GNSS antennas fixed to the vessel. It does this by comparing the phase of

satellite signals arriving at each antenna.

You can expect carrier phase differential measurements to deliver differential range

measurements with an accuracy of between two and 10 millimetres, and heading measurements

with an accuracy of between 0.1° to 0.5° RMS. These specifications are typical of multi-antenna

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-18

GNSS attitude sensors that have antenna separations of between one and three metres. They

will vary according to the multipath signal environment affecting the antennas.

Each of the above heading measurement methods have advantages and disadvantages:

• An inertial navigator that undergoes dynamic heading alignment delivers heading measurements

that suffer from drift but are relatively unaffected by noise.

• GAMS heading error is largely due to noise but exhibits no drift.

POS MV uses the advantages of each method to compensate for the disadvantages of the other. By

blending the measurements delivered by GAMS with those delivered by the inertial navigator, POS MV

averages the heading error over time and delivers blended measurements to an accuracy of between

0.02° and 0.1° RMS.

Heading Measurements

Heading measurements calculated by GAMS provide aiding data to the Kalman Filter to improve the

heading estimate made by the strap-down navigator.

Baselines

Heading measurements used by POS MV are:

• The true heading of the vessel in a geographic navigation frame of reference

• The ‘heading’ of the IMU in a geographic frame of reference - that is, the geographic heading of

the x-axis of the IMU body frame

To deliver heading measurements of the required accuracy, POS MV blends measurements made by

GAMS and measurements made by the inertial navigator. A Kalman Filter performs this blending

operation.

POS MV includes a primary and a secondary GNSS receiver, each with its own antenna. The GNSS

System topic on page 2-4 of this manual includes instructions to install both GNSS antennas so that they

are rigid relative to each other and relative to the IMU, and are separated by a distance of between one

and five metres.

By using a carrier phase differential GNSS algorithm, POS MV can measure the vector between the two

antennas in a geographic frame of reference. Figure 78 illustrates this situation. The Carrier Phase

Differential Position topic on page B-22 explains the process of carrier phase differential GNSS

measurement.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-19

Figure 78: Geographic Antenna Baseline Vector

POS MV computes a carrier phase differential position solution in geographic co-ordinates of Antenna 2

with respect to Antenna 1. This is the geographical antenna baseline vector:

ФANT = tan-1

Where:

ФANT =

the geographical antenna baseline vector

E =

the easterly component of the position

difference between Antenna 1 and Antenna 2

N =

the northerly component of the position

difference between Antenna 1 and Antenna 2

Because the geographical antenna baseline vector is referenced to true north, it varies as the vessel

changes course. However, the heading aiding data required by POS MV is the heading of the antenna

baseline referenced to the x-axis of the IMU.

POS MV transforms the geographic antenna baseline vector ФANT to the geographic IMU heading ФIMU

using the surveyed antenna baseline vector

rΔ

, which is the antenna baseline vector resolved in the

IMU co-ordinate frame. Figure 79 illustrates these headings and angles.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-20

Figure 79: Baseline Comparison

Where:

ФANT =

geographic antenna baseline vector - the

geographic vector of the line that joins the two

GNSS antennas; this vector varies as the

heading of the vessel changes

ФIMU =

geographic IMU vector - the geographic

heading of the IMU x-axis; this vector varies

as the heading of the vessel changes

rΔ

surveyed antenna baseline vector - the vector

that joins the two GNSS antennas; because

the IMU and the GNSS antennas are mounted

rigidly on the vessel, this vector remains fixed

Note: The example shown in Figure 79 is greatly simplified. It shows only the relative yaw angles made

by the baseline vectors. In practice, the transformation of one baseline vector to another may possibly

involve rotations in all three axis - roll, pitch and yaw.

Baseline Measurement

Geographic Antenna Baseline Vector

To compute a highly accurate value for ФANT based on carrier phase differential GNSS, GAMS must first

resolve the phase ambiguities in the differential carrier phase observables.

The GNSS receivers in POS MV use the L1 GNSS signal, which has a carrier frequency of 1575.42 MHz

and a wavelength of 19 cm. You can consider the range between each GNSS satellite and a GNSS

antenna as an integer number of L1 wavelengths plus a fraction of a wavelength.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-21

Each receiver can measure the fraction of a wavelength from each tracked satellite but cannot determine

the integer number of wavelengths between the transmitting satellite and the antenna.

By using satellite pseudo-range, the receiver can reduce the uncertainty in knowing the integer number of

wavelengths to less than 100. The remaining unknown integer number of wavelengths is the carrier

phase ambiguity.

GAMS uses an On-the-Fly (OTF) ambiguity resolution algorithm to resolve the carrier phase ambiguities.

On-the-fly implies that the algorithm resolves the phase ambiguities while the antennas are moving.

The OTF algorithm uses carrier phase measurements from five or more satellites to estimate and,

eventually, to identify a set of integer phase ambiguities for each satellite being tracked by both receivers.

The Carrier Phase Differential Position topic on page B-22 explains this process simply.

For the OTF algorithm to work, both receivers must track at least five common satellites to resolve the

ambiguities. Preferably, they should track six or more to resolve the ambiguities within a reasonable

length of time.

The GAMS OTF algorithm uses the roll, pitch and initial heading computed by POS MV (without GAMS

heading aiding) to accelerate the ambiguity resolution process. Practically, if POS MV uses the IMU

heading alignment process to compute the heading with an RMS accuracy of 1° or better, then ambiguity

resolution is almost instantaneous and can be completed in less than ten seconds. You can achieve this

degree of heading measurement accuracy without GAMS heading aiding by executing a few vessel turns

after you power-on POS MV.

This facility also allows GAMS to recover very quickly following a GNSS dropout caused by a signal

blockage when passing under a bridge for example.

Surveyed Antenna Baseline Vector

Figure 80 shows the geometry of the two GNSS antennas and the IMU. The antenna baseline vector is

shown as ∆RAB.

During normal operation, GAMS measures this vector resolved in the geographic or North-East-Down

frame (the geographic antenna baseline vector) by using a carrier phase differential GNSS algorithm.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-22

IMU body

frame

RARB

RAB

Antenna A

Antenna B

Figure 80: IMU and GNSS Antenna Geometry

To compute the heading of the IMU (that is the heading of the x-axis of the IMU body frame) GAMS must

have the components of ∆RAB resolved in the IMU body frame (the surveyed antenna baseline vector).

These components and the length of the vector are the GAMS installation parameters.

You can measure the GAMS installation parameters using a direct survey method, or POS MV can

calibrate them automatically as part of an antenna installation calibration.

Both methods have advantages and disadvantages:

• Direct measurement of the parameters using precision survey techniques provides the best

heading accuracy and allows POS MV to deliver full operational performance immediately.

However, it also involves a laborious and complicated survey exercise using qualified survey

personnel, special equipment and detailed engineering drawings of the vessel.

• Conversely, a POS MV installation calibration provides calibration parameters that are initially

less accurate. However, the system can perform the procedure during normal survey operations

without the need for any special additional equipment or personnel. You can improve the

accuracy of this type of calibration by empirical methods, or by making a direct comparison with

another heading instrument such as a gyrocompass.

Refer to Initial GNSS Configuration on page 4-17 for instructions to complete an installation calibration.

Carrier Phase Differential Position

GNSS measurements possess long-term stability and an accuracy that, with DGNSS, can be within a few

metres. However, the measurements do not possess sufficient accuracy to allow a precise determination

of the geographic antenna baseline vector.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-23

Instead, POS MV uses carrier phase differential position measurements to determine the relative position

of one GNSS antenna with respect to the other.

Using this method, the differential position computed by GAMS for the two antennas has an accuracy of

between two and 10 millimetres, depending on the local multipath environment. The heading data

supplied can therefore exhibit accuracy of the order 0.1° to 0.5° RMS, depending on the multipath

environment and on the horizontal separation distance between the two antennas. Errors of this

magnitude are typical of installations where the antenna separation distance is between one and three

metres.

Figure 81 represents the signal from one satellite in the GNSS constellation received by the GNSS

receiver. The drawing shows the true position of the receiver, although the receiver knows this position

only to a finite limit of accuracy.

Pseudorange is the distance measured between the transmitting satellite and the receiver, based on the

correlation between the transmitted code and the local reference code in the receiver. This measurement

includes no correction for errors in synchronization between the satellite and the receiver clocks.

In the example in Figure 81, the predicted position is shown as calculated from the satellite pseudo-

range.

GNSS signals at the L1 frequency (1575.42 MHz) have a wavelength of 0.19 metres. A GNSS receiver

could compute its precise distance from a transmitting satellite if it knew two facts:

• The exact number of integer wavelengths between the transmitter and the receiving antenna

• The phase of the received signal

Although the GNSS receiver can measure the phase of the received signal, it cannot determine exactly

how many integer wavelengths exist between the transmitter and the receiving antenna. It knows this

value to within approximately one hundred cycles by knowing the satellite pseudo-range, but there

remains some uncertainty in its precise determination.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-24

Predicted position from

satellite pseudo-range

Feasible positionsFeasible positions

Measured

phase

Number of cycles in

transmission path

Figure 81: Carrier Phase Cycle Measurement

Because of the uncertainty in its knowledge of the number of integer wavelengths in the transmission

path, the receiver has a number of feasible true positions. These all lie along the circumferences of

circles, centred on the satellite and varying in radius by the signal wavelength.

The range to any satellite is very large and so, for the purposes of this explanation, the feasible positions

lie along parallel straight lines. These lines are 19 cm apart and are within a circle of radius ‘R’ equal to

the uncertainty in the GNSS position solution. This is represented by the shaded circle in Figure 82.

The uncertainty in determining which line is the one on which the actual position lies is the carrier phase

ambiguity. It can be resolved by performing the same operation using multiple satellites.

Figure 83 shows that, by performing the same operation using signals from two satellites, the range of

feasible position solutions is reduced to a number of points where the lines intersect. For this to be

effective, the satellites must be spaced with respect to each other so that the lines intersect at a

reasonably wide angle.

19 cm

True position lies

along one of

these lines

Figure 82: Feasible Position Solutions from One Satellite

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-25

Feasible positions

Figure 83: Feasible Position Solutions from Two Satellites

Figure 84 shows how the range of feasible position solutions reduces still further when three satellites are

used to resolve the carrier phase ambiguities.

Feasible positions

Figure 84: Feasible Position Solutions from Three Satellites

In practice, the operation is more complex than the simple explanation above. This is for the following

reasons:

• The radius of the circle of uncertainty in knowing the position of the GNSS antenna is usually

much larger than the simple examples shown above. There are therefore many more points

within the circle that could be feasible true positions.

• Although the illustrations above show the situation in two dimensions, the actual computation

performed by POS MV involves the resolution of carrier phase ambiguities in three dimensions.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-26

In POS MV, resolution of the carrier phase ambiguities is one of the functions performed by the GNSS

Azimuth Measurement Subsystem (GAMS). The process uses an aided OTF algorithm to resolve the

carrier phase ambiguities while the antennas are moving and uses the following information to reach a

resolution more rapidly:

• Antenna baseline length - the distance between the two GNSS antennas. You can measure this

distance with a tape measure to the required accuracy of 5 mm (3/16 in). The measurement allows

GAMS to achieve ambiguity resolution within two to five minutes.

• Antenna baseline vector - the vector of the line joining the two GNSS antennas measured in the

vessel frame of reference. You can use direct survey techniques to measure this, or POS MV can

make the measurement automatically during the installation calibration (refer to the Surveyed

Antenna Baseline Vector topic on page B-21). The measurement allows GAMS to achieve

ambiguity resolution within 10 to 30 seconds.

• Roll, pitch and heading - information supplied by the strap-down navigator allows GAMS to

achieve ambiguity resolution in one to five seconds.

GAMS uses these three sources of information to reduce the space within which the OTF algorithm

searches for the correct ambiguity resolution.

The desired result of the carrier phase cycle measurement is the determination of the geographic antenna

baseline vector.

Alignment

Alignment is the process by which an INS determines the down and the north directions. It does this by

sensing the gravity and Earth angular rate vectors to obtain a levelled and aligned platform.

• A gimballed INS platform (refer to the INS Platform topic on page B-7) undergoes alignment when

its servomotors physically rotate the platform to make it level and oriented in a known direction,

called the wander angle, with respect to north.

• A strap-down INS undergoes alignment when the navigation processor continuously updates the

computed sensor-to-navigation Direction Cosine Matrix (DCM) until the DCM describes a

transformation to a mathematical platform that is level and has a known wander angle with

respect to true north.

Both these alignment mechanisms are conceptually equivalent. The explanations below therefore refer to

the gimballed platform arrangement because it is easier to visualise than the strap-down arrangement.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-27

Levelling

A horizontally unaligned INS will have a tilted platform with respect to the true horizontal of a navigation

frame of reference. This tilt causes the horizontally pointing accelerometers to sense some component of

gravity coupled by the angle of tilt, as shown in Figure 85. From this component of horizontal

acceleration, the INS computes an erroneous horizontal velocity.

A platform-levelling algorithm matches the INS-computed velocity with an independent velocity reference

and attributes the resulting velocity differences to platform tilt errors.

During a stationary alignment, the velocity reference is zero. Tilt estimates are then computed and

applied as feedback signals to the gimbal servomotors in a INS platform, or as corrections to the sensor-

to-navigation DCM in a strap-down INS. Because of these corrections, the velocity errors are nulled. The

platform (whether real or mathematical) is then considered horizontally levelled.

Figure 85: Horizontal Acceleration Error in a Tilted Platform

Gyrocompassing

Full alignment is complete when the platform is level and its x-axis points in a known direction with

respect to true north. The method by which an INS seeks north during an alignment is called

gyrocompassing.

A properly aligned platform will rotate about its north axis at Ω cos λ and about its azimuth (yaw) axis at -

Ω sin λ, where Ω is the Earth’s rotation rate (15°/hour) and λ is the latitude. This combined motion about

two axis will compensate for the rotation of the Earth so that the platform remains locally level.

If a heading error exists (i.e. the platform x-axis points away from north) then there will be a small

component of the Earth rate appearing in the east axis that remains uncompensated by the INS. The

platform will rotate slowly at the Earth rate about the east axis causing the platform to tilt away from the

level at a constant rate.

This slowly increasing platform tilt causes a sensed horizontal acceleration in the north direction due to

gravity coupling as shown in Figure 85. This northward acceleration error has the distinct characteristic of

growing linearly with time and it is therefore clearly recognisable if there are no other large sources of

acceleration error present.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-28

In a gimballed INS platform, the ramping northward acceleration can be used as a feedback signal to a

proportional-integral feedback servomechanism. This servomechanism rotates the platform about its

azimuth axis and drives the heading error towards zero. The levelling mechanism already described

continuously returns the platform to the level.

In a strap-down INS, the alignment algorithm separates the ramping northward acceleration due to

heading error from other constant acceleration errors due to platform tilts. It then computes the correction

needed by the sensor-to-navigator DCM to null the acceleration error and therefore remove the heading

error.

INS operation is similar to the mechanization of a gyrocompass.

Because gravity is an observable quantity through the accelerometers, levelling occurs rapidly, usually

within 30 seconds. The actual time that it takes to achieve levelling depends on the slewing rate of the

gimbal motors of a INS platform, or the iteration rate of a strap-down INS algorithm.

Once levelling is complete, the ramping northward acceleration error caused by heading error becomes

weakly observable against a background of acceleration transients due to vessel motion and

accelerometer noise.

The alignment algorithm must filter these random disturbances in the acceleration signal. Therefore, a

heading alignment will take longer to complete, typically from 10 to 30 minutes depending on latitude.

Error Sources

Once the heading alignment is complete, the INS can begin to navigate free Inertially. Free inertial

navigation allows an INS to reach a navigation solution without input from any independent form of

navigation aid.

The problem with this form of navigation is that it relies totally on the accuracy and stability of the inertial

sensor assembly. In practice, there are a number of errors to consider, each of which contributes in some

way to a deterioration in the accuracy of the navigation solution supplied by an INS:

• Alignment errors - these are errors in roll, pitch and heading measurements following the

completion of an alignment. They arise from errors in the inertial sensing assembly and from

motion disturbances during alignment.

• Accelerometer bias - this is a constant offset in the accelerometer output. It changes randomly

each time you power-on the INS. Typical values for high quality accelerometers, as used in POS

MV, are between 50 and 500 μg.

• Accelerometer scale factor -This is an error in the assumed scale factor on the accelerometer

output. It results in an acceleration error proportional to the sensed acceleration. Typical values

for high quality accelerometers, as used in POS MV, are 0.01 to 0.02%.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-29

• Gyro drift -This appears as a constant output from a gyro when there is no angular rate of rotation

present. The gyros used in POS MV exhibit drift rates of between 1° and 5° per hour.

• Gyro random noise -This is an uncorrelated error caused by the internal noise characteristics of

the gyro. The high quality gyros used in POS MV exhibit a spectral noise density of (0.07°)2 per

hour.

The above component-specific errors cause the following navigational errors to occur:

• Schuler oscillations having a period of 84.4 minutes (see the information on the Schuler

Oscillations on page B-30)

• Space rate oscillations having a nominal period of 24 hours

• Linear position error rate

Over short navigation periods of several hours, the space rate and the linear position error rate are not

separately observable and are therefore viewed together.

Because of the above sources of error, POS MV cannot perform free inertial navigation for extended

periods without the introduction of an increasingly significant error.

Instead, POS MV implements an aided inertial navigator that controls the navigation errors and calibrates

the inertial sensor errors using GNSS data as a reference.

Aided Inertial Navigation

The primary purpose of an aided inertial navigation system, also called an integrated inertial navigation

system, is to compute a blended navigation solution. It does this by using a complementary blending

algorithm to combine inertial navigation data with aiding data from another source.

In POS MV, the aiding data comes from the integral GNSS receivers. The IMU and the GNSS navigation

sensors are complementary because they meet the following conditions:

• The set of navigation sensors together generate all the information required to compute a

complete navigation solution.

• The navigation sensors have complementary error dynamics because all their error dynamics are

observable. Each complementary sensor can calibrate the errors of the other because their

respective errors are separately observable in any linear combination of their outputs.

The important characteristics of the two navigation sensors used by POS MV can be summarised:

• The INS position error grows by several nautical miles per hour in the long term (over several

hours) but is smooth and dynamically accurate in the short term (over a few minutes). The output

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-30

also exhibits a strongly recognisable Schuler oscillation superimposed on the growing position

error.

• The GNSS position error is noisy in the short term but exhibits a constant long-term error of only

a few metres (with DGNSS).

Schuler Oscillations

Schuler oscillations appear as regular oscillations about a mean

position in the output of a free inertial navigator. You can also see

them on the output from a gyrocompass. These oscillations have a

period of 84.4 minutes, which is the theoretical period of a

pendulum having a length equal to the radius of the Earth.

In a free inertial navigation system, the oscillations occur as the

platform (whether mechanical or mathematical) over-corrects for

small residual errors in platform levelling and alignment. These

residual errors may arise because of uncorrected bias in the

accelerometers or the gyros.

You can expect the best performance from the aided inertial navigation system when the advantages of

one navigation sensor compensate for the disadvantages of the other.

The following is a simplified example of how navigation data from an INS and a GNSS receiver can be

blended or integrated in a complementary fashion (refer to Figure 86). Note that POS MV uses a

significantly more complex process involving a Kalman Filter.

1. The position solution determined by the INS includes an error that varies with time. This error

comprises a drift, which increases at a linear rate with time, and the Schuler oscillations having a

period of 84.4 minutes. Depending on the quality of components used in the INS, the overall

combined effect of these two error sources can be considerable.

2. The DGNSS receiver delivers a position solution that is stable in the long term and includes an

error of only a few metres (depending on the quality of differential correction information

supplied). However, the DGNSS position solution includes short-term errors of several metres

amplitude that appear as ‘noise’ on the position solution.

3. Calculating the difference between the INS position and the DGNSS position, and then passing

this difference through a low-pass filter can determine a good estimate of the INS position error.

The filter smoothes the random noise from the DGNSS solution and passes the INS position error

and the small steady-state DGNSS position offset.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-31

4. Having obtained this estimate of the INS position error, the system then subtracts it from the INS

computed position. This delivers a blended solution with the long-term INS position error and the

DGNSS short-term noise removed. The only remaining error is the constant position offset from

the DGNSS that has passed through the filter.

The blended position solution now has the best characteristics of both the INS and the DGNSS; the

position solution is smoothed like the INS solution, and has a bounded error that is less than or equal to

the DGNSS solution.

INS position error

INS-

Filtered INS

Blended North position error

nmi

1 nmi

20 m

INS position error GPS position error

INS - GPS position

difference

Filtered INS - GPS

position difference

Blended North position

error

1 M

2 m

Low - pass

filter

INS

DGPS

Figure 86: Example of Complementary Navigation Sensor Blending

In-Motion Alignment

The paragraphs contained under the Alignment topic on page B-26 describe how an inertial navigation

platform achieves alignment under static conditions. An important feature that the integration of inertial

navigation and GNSS offers is in-motion alignment of the inertial navigator.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Theory of Operation

B-32

The magnitude of Schuler oscillations in the inertial navigator depends on the quality of platform

alignment. Similarly, the rate at which the position error grows depends partly on the quality of alignment

and partly on the magnitude of gyro bias.

To accomplish in-motion alignment the simple low-pass filter shown in Figure 86 on page B-31 is a more

sophisticated filter that has built into it a mathematical model. This mathematical model includes details of

the relationship between the quality of INS alignment, the gyro and accelerometer errors, and the

respective magnitudes of the Schuler oscillations and position error growth.

Such a filter is an algorithm that combines the operations of filtering and estimation. Its main function is to

estimate the internal dynamics of a system using measurements of the system outputs.

POS MV uses this ‘Kalman’ filter with the INS-GNSS position difference to estimate the position error, and

the cause of the INS position error (i.e. the alignment errors and the inertial sensor errors).

• The INS uses the estimated alignment error to correct and therefore improve the alignment of the

INS.

• The INS uses the estimated errors in the inertial sensors to correct and calibrate the outputs from

the inertial sensors.

This process does not require the INS platform (and therefore the vessel) to be stationary. In fact,

movements of the vessel actually assist the calibration process and provide a faster and more accurate

inertial sensor calibration.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Training

C-1

Appendix C Training

The POS MV Aided Inertial Navigation System is a complex assembly of interactive subsystems that

delivers position and attitude measurements for use in a variety of survey applications. Those who will

install, operate and maintain the system will do so more effectively after they receive training in all

aspects of its operation.

In support of this philosophy, Applanix has developed a comprehensive training program for all personnel

who may be involved with POS MV.

Items covered by the course include:

• POS MV Overview

• Principles of Operation - Inertial Navigation Systems, GAMS, GNSS

• Hardware Installation and Configuration

• MV-POSView Controller Program Overview

• Simple Maintenance

The course includes simplified explanations for each subject. There is no requirement for participants to

be entirely familiar with electronics or computers, although it may prove easier to grasp some of the

concepts if attendees possess some basic knowledge in these areas.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Software Installation

D-1

Appendix D Software Installation

Applanix supplies a copy of the MV-POSView Controller software, for use with a PC based Microsoft

Windows® environment, with each POS MV system. This program is used to configure the POS MV once

the system components have been installed and connected.

Subsequently, you can use the program to control POS MV and to view and log its data. Alternatively, for

installations where the use of a controlling PC is not convenient, you can configure POS MV to run in a

stand-alone mode without the need for a controlling PC.

Refer to the System Configuration and the System Operation descriptions on pages 4-1 and 5-1

respectively for instructions on how to configure and control the POS MV using the controller program.

Supplied Software

A compact disk containing POS MV

software is included with each system.

Hardware and Software

Requirements:

The minimum requirements of a Personal

Computer (PC) running the POS MV

software are listed.

MV-POSView Controller

Program:

The MV-POSView Controller program must

be run from the hard disk of the controlling

PC. You cannot run the program from the

installation Compact Disk (CD).

Firmware Upgrade:

Upgrading the POS MV embedded

firmware from a PC connected through the

Ethernet port.

Supplied Software

A compact disk containing POS MV software is included with each system. The following provides a brief

description of the software contained on the CD.

• MV-POSView Controller - required to configure the various POS MV components, operate the

system, access and display information, and to monitor system health.

• POSLoader - windows based Graphical User Interface (GUI) application that is required when

upgrading the POS MV firmware; it automates firmware upgrades through an Ethernet port. The

software checks the current version of POS firmware and updates the requested new firmware.

POSLoader requests a password prior to operation.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Software Installation

D-2

• POSConfig - windows based GUI application that is required for enhancements or automating

changes to the POS MV system setup (e.g. enabling software options). Pricing and enabling

passwords are available from Applanix Customer Support.

Hardware and Software Requirements

Make certain the controlling PC meets or exceeds the requirements outlined in Table 39.

Table 39: Controlling PC Requirements

Item

Minimum Requirements

Processor

Intel Pentium® III or equivalent

Memory

128 MB RAM

Operating System

Microsoft Windows® XP or Windows Vista® or

Windows7®

Free Disk Space

8 MB

Ethernet Card

10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet; IEEE 802.3 Standard

MV-POSView Controller Program

You must install the MV-POSView Controller program on the hard disk of the controlling PC. You cannot

run the program directly from the installation compact disk.

This program communicates with POS MV through an Ethernet LAN port. You must have Microsoft

Windows® XP, Windows Vista® or Windows7® installed on your PC before you can install and use the

controller program.

Note: Applanix recommends the removal of previous versions of the POS Controller. Keeping previous

versions may result in user confusion and program instability.

To install the MV-POSView Controller program:

1. Open Windows® on controlling PC.

2. Insert Compact Disk (CD) containing POS MV software into controlling PC’s CD drive.

3. Select Start, Run from Windows® Desktop.

4. Enter a:setup.exe.

5. Select OK to start software installation.

6. PC should display setup window with MV-POSView Controller Setup dialogue. This includes a

default installation directory that can be changed to another location.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Software Installation

D-3

7. Select Continue. If controller directory does not exist, installation software will create it. During

installation, program copies a number of files from compact disk to controller directory. These

files include posmv.exe executable file; posmv.hlp file, a read.me file and a set of dynamically

linked library files (*.dll).

8. Installation software prompts for creation of icons. Skip this step if default icons are preferred.

Otherwise, select default program group or a new program group (either of which are created by

installation software through Windows®). Also, icons may be installed into an existing program

group.

This completes the installation of the MV-POSView Controller program.

Firmware Upgrade

You can upgrade the embedded software inside the PCS by connecting to the PCS through its Ethernet

interface and using the POS Loader program to upload the new files.

1. Contact Applanix for an authorization code. Also, S/N of PCS is required.

2. Copy upgrade file to PC. Upgrade file is available from Applanix or may be downloaded from

Internet site. Upgrade file is larger than two MB and may take a considerable time to download.

3. Once file saved to PC hard disk, run POS Loader program. Program locates PCS on your

network and displays its network address. Select PCS and then continue with upgrade procedure.

4. A dialogue panel appears and lists product identification and serial number. Write these details

down carefully and contact Applanix.

5. In Loader program, type authorization code into its text field and continue with upgrade.

6. Observe progress of file transfer and wait for software prompts. During reboot sequence, PCS

decodes and error-checks upgrade software prior to beginning normal operation. These

additional steps mean that first Initialization sequence, after installing an upgrade, will take

considerably longer to complete than normal. Resulting total boot time will be approximately three

to four minutes. Subsequent Initializations will proceed normally.

7. Run MV-POSView Controller program and select View, Statistics to verify that system is

successfully upgraded. Note software revision level.

This completes the upgrade procedure.

Note: The error checking routine performed by the PCS prevents the system from overwriting the current

version of firmware until it has error-checked the new version. If the PCS finds a corruption in the new file,

it will abort the upgrade procedure and retain the previous version of software.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Drawings

E-1

Appendix E Drawings

Figure 87 IMU Types 36, 37 and 42 Mechanical Interface

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Drawings

E-2

Figure 88 IMU Type 26 Mechanical Interface

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Drawings

E-3

IMU shown with adaptor plate 10004691. Contact Applanix for additional information.

Figure 89 IMU Type 31 and 40 Mechanical Interface

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Drawings

E-4

NOTE: IMU type 38 overall height is 195.5mm as shown, IMU type 39 overall height is 205.5mm.

Figure 90: IMU Type 38 or 39 Mechanical Interface

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Drawings

E-5

Figure 91: IMU Type 21 Mechanical Interface

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Drawings

E-6

Figure 92: IMU Type 21 Mounting Tray

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Drawings

E-7

Figure 93: IMU Type 33 Mechanical Interface

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Drawings

E-8

Figure 94: Trimble Zephyr II GNSS Antenna Footprint

Phase centre is 66 mm above bottom of mounting thread.

Figure 95: Trimble 382AP GNSS Antenna Footprint

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Drawings

E-9

Figure 96: PCS Footprint – POS MV V5-1

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Drawings

E-10

Figure 97: PCS Footprint - POS MV V5

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Drawings

E-11

Figure 98: IMU Mounting Plate

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Patch Test

F-1

Appendix F Patch Test

This appendix suggests a simple procedure for performing a patch test to remove any residual errors in

the POS MV mount angle configuration. You should perform a patch test before you use POS MV data

for survey purposes.

Note: The calibration procedures explained in this appendix provide generic guidance only.

Note: Specific survey sonar may require different procedures, or individual survey companies may set

their own patch test procedures. You should follow the instructions in this appendix only if there are no

preferred procedures already in force.

Survey Area

To complete the calibration operations detailed in this appendix successfully, the vessel should perform a

series of survey lines and manoeuvres over an area of seabed that conforms closely to the following

requirements:

1. There should be two distinct regions:

• A region where the seabed is flat and level

• A region immediately adjacent where the seabed slopes at a relatively steep angle

(greater than 10°)

Figure 99 shows an ideal survey calibration area.

2. Ideally, the survey calibration area should also include a readily identifiable target object at a fixed

position on the seabed. This could be a rock, a wreck or any other relatively small structure.

3. The survey calibration area should be sufficiently large so that the survey vessel can manoeuvre

freely within its boundaries and can perform a series of straight survey lines approximately 300 to

500 metres long.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Patch Test

F-2

Figure 99: Ideal Survey Calibration Area

Calibration

The procedure outlined in this appendix includes a calibration check on the following parameters. Perform

the following:

• Roll measurement

• Position time delay

• Gyrocompass heading

• Pitch measurement

Roll Calibration

Complete the gyrocompass calibration routine and remove any offset that may exist.

1. Sail a line to survey the flat region of the test area (A to B of Figure 99 on page F-2).

2. Turn through 180° and sail a reciprocal course along the same line. Log this line separately from

the first survey line.

3. Use the multibeam software and select a single point along both survey lines (point O of

Figure 99 on page F-2). Examine the profile of the seabed perpendicular to the course of the

vessel at this point (the line X–X of Figure 99 on page F-2) and confirm that both survey lines

show the same seabed profile. They should be substantially coincident as shown in Figure 100

on page F-3. If they are not (as shown in Figure 101 on page F-3), this indicates that there is a

constant steady state roll offset in the mounting angles. Use the multibeam software to

compensate for this offset.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Patch Test

F-3

4. Repeat the above survey tests to confirm that any adjustments you make to the multibeam

software have removed the roll offset.

5. As a final check, perform a similar survey following the line D–E in Figure 99 on page F-2. At the

end of the survey line, turn through 180° and repeat the survey line E–D, logging both lines

separately. Check that the profiles from both survey lines coincide where they cross the line B–C.

Figure 100: Correct Roll Calibration

Figure 101: Incorrect Roll Calibration

Position Time Delay

1. Complete a sound velocity profile for the multibeam sonar and correct any errors that may exist.

2. Set a vessel speed of 4 knots and sail a straight line that crosses the flat and the sloping regions

of the test area (line A-C in Figure 99 on page F-2). Repeat the line on a reciprocal heading and

at the same speed. Log both lines separately.

3. Increase the vessel speed to 8 knots and repeat both lines. Log both lines separately.

4. Compare the two lines surveyed in the same direction but at different speeds. Any offset that

appears on the seabed chart between the two runs arises from a position time delay. Use the

multibeam software to correct any such error.

5. Now compare the two lines that run in opposite directions but at the same speed. Any offset that

appears on the seabed chart between these two runs arises from a pitch offset in the mounting

angles. Use the multibeam software to correct any such error.

6. Finally, repeat the survey lines to verify that you have removed all offsets successfully.

Gyrocompass Heading

Harbour Calibration

Ideally, you should perform the gyrocompass calibration while the vessel is in a harbour:

1. Power-on the POS MV and allow it to settle in accordance with instructions supplied by the

manufacturer.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

Patch Test

F-4

2. With the vessel tied alongside use survey techniques to determine the precise heading

against a known landmark. Record this value together with the heading displayed by the

gyrocompass.

3. Turn the vessel through 180° and again measure the precise heading of the vessel. Record

this value together with the heading displayed by the POS MV.

4. Note any offsets that may exist between the two values for surveyed heading and the

corresponding values for gyrocompass heading. Follow the instructions supplied by the sonar

manufacturer to configure the system with these gyrocompass offset values.

Sea Calibration

You can use the following procedure to calibrate the gyrocompass at sea. However, this method is

inherently less accurate than the preferred method detailed above and you should use it only where

there are no alternatives.

1. Sail a straight course while making a calibration survey chart of the seabed. Observe the

position of a target object on the chart which, ideally, should occur at about the halfway point

of the survey line.

2. At the end of the first survey line, turn the vessel through 180° and repeat the survey line in

the opposite direction. Again, note the position of the target object.

3. Any gyrocompass offset will appear as an apparent shift in the position of the target on the

seabed.

Survey Procedure

Each operator is likely to have a standard procedure that you should follow when performing a multibeam

survey. Similarly, the manufacturer of the multibeam system is likely to have a set of specific instructions

detailing how to configure and use their system within such a survey. You should give precedence to any

existing instructions and operating procedures over the procedures outlined in this appendix.

Generally, the following procedures should be included as part of any multibeam survey:

1. Verify the sound velocity profile.

2. Even if the system was previously calibrated, the first and the last survey lines should be sailed in

both directions to enable a post-processing calibration check.

3. Finally, an extra line should be sailed perpendicular to the other survey lines. This allows

detection of any changes in sound velocity or tidal action during post-processing.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

IP68 Connector Handling

G-1

Appendix G IP68 Connector Handling

Handling Instructions

• The connector should not be exposed to long term heat or sunshine.

• If this occurs, and the connectors are very dry, soak in fresh water before use.

• Ensure the connectors are lubricated - the recommended lubricant is Loctite 8021 as a spray or

Molykote 44 Medium as a paste - use either sparingly.

• Any accumulation of sand or mud in the female contact should be removed with fresh water. Spraying

or the application of grease could dammage the the female seals; see Figure 102.

• Do not over tighten the bulkhead nuts

• Do not disconnect by pulling on the

cable and avoid sharp bends at cable

entry.

• When disconnecting, pull straight, not

at an angle.

Ensure the above points are fulfilled to get

the best out of your connectors. If in doubt,

please contact Applanix.

Figure 102: IP68 Connector

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

POS-GPS Timing

H-1

Appendix H POS-GPS Timing

Background

Global Positioning System (GPS) time is a continuous measurement of time from an epoch started on

January 6, 1980 at midnight (0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds) Universal Time Coordinated (UTC). GPS

Time is often stated in a number of weeks and seconds from this GPS Time epoch. GPS Time does not

introduce leap seconds and therefore, is ahead of UTC by a number of seconds.

The GPS Master Control Station, located at Schriever AFB in Colorado, steers GPS Time to within one

microsecond (less leap seconds) of UTC. Navigation messages transmitted by the Space Vehicles (SVs)

contains parameters that permit users to compute an estimate of the current GPS/UTC sub-microsecond

difference as well as the number of leap seconds introduced into UTC since the GPS epoch. GPS Time is

derived from the GPS Composite Clock (CC), consisting of the atomic clocks at each Monitor Station and

all of the GPS SV frequency standards.

The following identify a few of the many time standards:

• Local time is the date/time reported by your PC. Local time differs from UTC by the number of

hours for your time zone (plus local PC clock errors).

• UTC, popularly known as GMT (Greenwich Mean Time), or Zulu time.

• GPS, Global Positioning System time, is the atomic time scale implemented by the atomic clocks

in the GPS ground control stations and the GPS satellites.

• TAI, Temps Atomique International, is the international atomic time scale based on a continuous

counting of the International System of Units (SI) second.

Because GPS and TAI time do not have leap seconds, they will change by one second with respect to

UTC whenever a leap second is inserted. GPS and UTC time scales were aligned when GPS Time

began on January 6, 1980. TAI and UTC time scales were aligned when TAI time began on January 1,

1958.

Date

GPS to UTC

Offset (sec)

Date

TAI to UTC

Offset (sec)

Jan 6, 1980

Jan 1, 1980

Jul 1, 1981

Jul 1, 1982

Jul 1, 1983

Jul 1, 1985

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

POS-GPS Timing

H-2

Date

GPS to UTC

Offset (sec)

Date

TAI to UTC

Offset (sec)

Jan 1, 1988

Jan 1, 1990

Jan 1, 1991

Jul 1, 1992

Jul 1, 1993

Jul 1, 1994

Jan 1, 1996

Jul 1, 1997

Jan 1, 1999

Jan 1, 2006

Jan 1, 2009

Notes:

1. GPS and TAI are ahead of UTC time, see Figure 103.

Figure 103: GPS. TAI and UTC Time

2. Consult the International Earth Rotation Service (IERS) web pages for more quantitative

information.

GNSS Timing Basics

One Pulse Per Second

The basis for all time and frequency functions is the One Pulse Per Second (1PPS) signal supplied by the

GNSS receiver. This signal is typically a short logic pulse, one edge of which is adjusted by the receiver

to be ‘on time’ with respect to the one second epoch of UTC. In order to do this, the GNSS receiver needs

to know its position.

If the position is unknown, the receiver can find its own position and solve for time by tracking four or

more GNSS satellites. This is called the dynamic mode, and is the mode used in moving platform

applications.

UTC

GPS

TAI

15 Leap

Seconds

15 Leap

Seconds

19 Seconds

Fixed

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

POS-GPS Timing

H-3

Alternatively, timing receivers can be told to use a known fixed position, in which case the receiver can

solve for time by tracking a minimum of one satellite. This is called the static mode, and it is used in

applications where the position is fixed.

Timing Accuracy

Errors in the time of occurrence of the 1PPS pulses from the GNSS receiver consist of three parts:

• Bias - a fixed offset due to uncompensated delay errors in the receiver/antenna system

• Drift - variations in timing over long periods due primarily to differences in satellites tracked over

time

• Jitter - short-term variations in timing from pulse to pulse

These error sources are inherent in the both the GNSS system and the GNSS receiver. The sum of these

errors can be as low as a few tenths of a microsecond or up to a few microseconds. This high level of

accuracy is possible because the timekeeping maintained within the GNSS system is continuously

adjusted to null out timing errors.

Output Characteristics

The 1PPS signal (from the GNSS) is usually in the form of a pulse of whose duration varies between

microseconds and milliseconds, at Transistor-Transistor Logic (TTL) or RS-232 signal levels.

Time Message

The 1PPS signal provides an accurate time mark, but is ambiguous unless coupled with a time stamp.

Most timing systems specify a time message that is transmitted (usually over a serial data port) that gives

the date and time of day for each occurrence of the 1PPS signal. This time message is sent in between

the 1PPS signals and may be specified to time-tag either the 1PPS that has just occurred, or the one that

is just about to happen.

POS System Timing

There are a number of aspects to POS system timing; there is the internal timing of sensor data and the

navigation solution, there is the ability to synchronize external equipment to POS, or POS can be

synchronized to external equipment time, all ICD data output from POS includes time tags, and the user

can generate event pulses which are time tagged by POS and then made available for output or logging.

Each of these items are described in the following sections.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

POS-GPS Timing

H-4

Internal POS Timing

POS uses its internal clock to keep track of POS time, which starts from 0 when the system is powered up

and continually increases. POS time never resets the way GPS and UTC seconds of the week do. POS

uses the 1PPS pulse and the corresponding time message from the Primary GNSS receiver to 1) set an

internal GPS and UTC offset with respect to POS time and 2) correct the drift in the internal clock.

The Primary GNSS receiver must has sufficient satellites visible when POS is started so that it will

generate the 1PPS and time message. Without this data POS will not be able to synchronize its internal

clock and navigation will not proceed. Once the internal clock is synchronized there can be gaps in the

Primary GNSS output of 1PPS and time message without adversely affecting POS performance.

The Events pane on the main POSView window, see page 5-6, displays the Universal Time, Coordinated

(UTC) time of the most recent PPS pulse transmitted by the primary GNSS receiver. The Count field for

PPS indicates the total number of signals recorded from the GNSS receiver.

Synchronizing External Equipment to POS

To synchronize external equipment time with POS, the external equipment must read and record the

1PPS signal and one of the corresponding time messages from POS. With this information the external

device can adjust its internal timing to match POS timing using either GPS or UTC as the time base. Any

data recorded by the external device can then be time stamped with a time synchronized to POS so that

the data can later be merged with POS data using a common time base.

Processing the time differential for each new 1PPS pulse and time

message allows the user to compensate for drift in the external device

clock.

The PPS pulse is present at the rear panel IO connectors and is configurable for pulse width and polarity

from the POSView Settings – Events window. Figure 104 shows the parameters of the 1PPS signal.

Figure 104: 1PPS Signal Characteristics

The time messages corresponding to PPS can be configured to be output on any COM port. The various

1PPS time message outputs provide the time of the previous 1PPS signal. PPS time is available from

+ Vdc

0 Vdc

Configurable

1000 us (1 s)

= Positive pulse

= Negative pulse

+ Vdc

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

POS-GPS Timing

H-5

POS in either a NMEA message (ZDA or PPS) or Binary output message (PPS or TM1B). Refer to COM

Ports starting on page 3-1 for message format details.

Synchronizing POS to External Equipment

POS maintains a User time offset in addition to the GPS and UTC offsets with respect to its internal POS

time. This provides the user with the option of supplying POS with an external time message that will be

used to set the User time offset. Once set, the User time can be used as a time tag for ICD output data

groups.

To synchronize POS with external equipment time (User Time), the external equipment must read and

record the 1PPS signal from POS and transmit its User Time to POS on the Ethernet port. Refer to the

description of the Ethernet Connector on page 2-21.

‘Message 55 - User Time Recovery’ (Table 40) is extracted from Applanix document PUBS-ICD-003759.

This message specifies the time of the last PPS in User Time to the POS. It directs POS to synchronize

its User Time with the time specified in the User PPS Time field. POS accepts this message at anytime at

a maximum rate of once per second.

To establish User Time synchronization, the user must send the User Time of last PPS to POS with this

message after the PPS has occurred. The resolution of time synchronization is one microsecond.

Table 40: Message 55 - User Time Recovery

Item

Bytes

Format

Value

Units

Message start

Char

$MSG

N/A

Message ID

Ushort

N/A

Byte count

Ushort

N/A

Transaction

number

Ushort

Input: Transaction

number

Output: [65533, 65535]

N/A

User PPS time

Double

[0, ) default = 0.0

seconds

User Time

conversion

factor

Double

[0, ) default = 1.0

/seconds

Pad

Short

N/A

Checksum

Ushort

N/A

Message end

Char

N/A

This message must be sent by a user application that connects to the POS TCP/IP socket interface

(Control Port) to accommodate both the User Timing input and the substitute controller communication.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

POS-GPS Timing

H-6

Time Tagging of Output Data

POS formats data into ICD groups as described in PUBS-MAN-003759. The ICD groups are output in

real-time on the Display Port and Data Port, are logged on the removable media and internal flash drive

and are output on the Ethernet logging port. Which groups are output on which port are under user

control.

All ICD groups have the same basic structure as shown in Table 41 (extracted from Applanix document

PUBS-ICD-003759). The selections of the time and distance types are made from the POSView Settings

– Installation – Tags, Multipath & Autostart window. To ensure the POS data are useful for post-

processing using POSPac, set Time Tag 1 to GPS time.

Table 41: Common ICD Group Structure

Item

Bytes

Format

Value

Units

Group start

Char

$GRP

N/A

Group ID

Ushort

Group specific

N/A

Byte count

Ushort

Group specific

bytes

Time 1

Double

N/A

sec

Time 2

Double

N/A

sec

Distance tag

Double

N/A

Time types

Byte

Time 1 Select Value: bits 0-3

Time 1: POS time 0

Time 1: GPS time 1 (default)

Time 1: UTC time 2

Time 2 Select Value: bits 4-7

Time 2: POS time 0 (default)

Time 2: GPS time 1

Time 2: UTC time 2

Time 2: User Time 3

Distance type

Byte

Distance select Value

N/A 0

POS distance 1 (default)

DMI distance 2

Group specific data fields

Pad

0-3

Byte

N/A

Checksum

Ushort

N/A

Group end

Char

N/A

The navigation solution, sensor data and user event groups are time tagged with the Time of Validity of

the data. Other low rate (1 Hz) status type groups are time tagged with the time when the group was

processed.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

POS-GPS Timing

H-7

POS outputs data in NMEA and Binary formats in addition to the ICD format described. Not all formats

have a time field, the assumption being that they are output with minimal latency with respect to their

Time of Validity. For those formats that do incorporate a time field, POS will insert the Time of Validity of

the data in the appropriate time base.

Event Time Tagging

Event inputs can be used to capture any external event whose time or distance when the event occurred

is important for processing the mission data. The user must arrange for the external equipment to

generate a digital pulse. POS is configured to detect the event pulse from the POSView Settings –

Events window. Upon detecting an event input pulse, POS will record the time and distance into an ICD

Event group, within 1 µs of the pulse edge. The time and distance types will be the same as configured

for all other ICD groups. These Event ICD groups can be output or logged in the same manner as other

ICD groups.

The Events pane of the POSView main window displays the last times and counts for events 1 and 2. To

view all the events, open the POSView View – Event Data window.

ICD groups 5, 6, 30 and 31 correspond to Events 1, 2, 3 and 4.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

POS-GPS Timing

GLOSSARY

Acceleration of Gravity

Acceleration of Gravity (g), not to be confused with the force of gravity (Fgrav), is the acceleration

experienced by an object when the only force acting upon it is the force of gravity. On and near the

Earth's surface, the value for the acceleration of gravity is approximately 9.8 m/s/s. It is the same

acceleration value for all objects, regardless of their mass (and assuming that the only significant force

is gravity).

Angular Rate

Defines how quickly an angle is changing. The faster the angle changes, the higher the angular rate.

Can be expressed as:

changeangleofduration

angleinchange

ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A code in which each alphanumeric character is

represented as a number from 0 to 127, translated into a 7-bit binary code for the computer.

Attitude

Attitude determination is the process of estimating the orientation of a vehicle (space, air, marine or

land) by using known reference points and vehicle attitude. Vehicle attitude sensors supply roll, pitch,

and yaw data to a computer for processing with navigational data (reference points).

Baseline Vector

X, Y and Z components of the displacement from the Primary to secondary GNSS antenna phase

centre. The baseline vector is resolved in the Vehicle body frame.

Baud Rate

Baud Rate, in computer science, is commonly a reference to the speed at which a modem can

transmit data. Often incorrectly assumed to indicate the number of bits per second (bps) transmitted,

baud rate actually measures the number of events, or signal changes, that occur in one second.

Because one event can actually encode more than one bit in high-speed digital communications, baud

rate and bits per second are not always synonymous, and the latter is the more accurate term to apply

to modems. For example, a so-called 9600-baud modem that encodes four bits per event actually

operates at 2400 baud but transmits 9600 bits per second (2400 events times 4 bits per event) and

thus should be called a 9600 bps modem.

Bit

The smallest element of computer storage, the bit is a single digit in a binary number (0 or 1). Groups

of bits make up storage units in the computer, called "characters," "bytes," or "words," which are

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

POS-GPS Timing

manipulated as a group. The most common is the byte, made up of eight bits and equivalent to one

alphanumeric character.

Bits are widely used as a measurement for transmission. Ten megabits (Mb) per second means that

ten million pulses are transmitted every second. Measurements for storage devices such as disks, files

and databases are given in bytes rather than bits.

Byte

The common unit of computer storage from micro to mainframe, the byte is made up of eight binary

digits (bits). A ninth bit may be used in the memory circuits as a parity bit for error checking. The term

was originally coined to mean the smallest addressable group of bits in a computer (has not always

been eight).

C/A

The coarse/acquisition or clear/acquisition code modulated onto the GNSS L1 signal. This code is a

sequence of 1023 pseudorandom binary bi-phase modulations on the GNSS carrier at a chipping rate

of 1.023 MHz, thus having a code repetition period of one millisecond. The code was selected to

provide good acquisition properties. Also known as the "civilian code".

Control Port

Accessed via the LAN connector, the Control Port is designed to receive and acknowledge setup and

control commands from MV-POSView Controller. The Control port is not a physical port. Rather, it is a

subset of the Ethernet Interface.

Data Port

Accessed via the LAN connector, the Data Port is designed to broadcast high rate navigation and raw

sensor data. The Data port is not a physical port. Rather, it is a subset of the Ethernet Interface.

DGNSS

Differential GNSS. A technique used to improve positioning or navigation accuracy by determining the

positioning error at a known location and subsequently incorporating a corrective factor (by real-time

transmission of corrections or by post-processing) into the position calculations of another receiver

operating in the same area and simultaneously tracking the same satellites.

Dilution of Precision

Dilution of Precision (DOP) is a dimensionless number that accounts for the purely geometric

contribution of the position of the satellites to the uncertainty in a position fix. Standard terms for the

GNSS application are: GDOP-Geometric Dilution of Precision (three position coordinates plus clock

offset in the solution); PDOP-Position Dilution of Precision (three coordinates); HDOP-Horizontal

Dilution of Precision (two horizontal coordinates); VDOP-Vertical Dilution of Precision (height only);

TDOP-Time Dilution of Precision (clock offset only); RDOP-Relative Dilution of Precision (normalized

to 60 seconds).

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

POS-GPS Timing

Display Port

Accessed via the LAN connector, the display port is designed to broadcast low rate (once per second)

data and status information for display by MV-POSView Controller. The display port is not a physical

port; it is a subset of the Ethernet Interface.

Dropout

Loss of signal.

Ephemeris

The predictions of current satellite positions transmitted to the user in the data message. A list of

accurate positions or locations of a celestial object as a function of time. Available as "broadcast

ephemeris" or as post-processed "precise ephemeris."

Force of Gravity

Gravity is a force that exists between the Earth and objects which near it. All objects on Earth

experience this force and is represented it by the symbol Fgrav.

GNSS

Global Navigation Satellite System. A constellation of satellites that allows precise determination of

position by analysis of satellite signals.

GPS Time

Highly accurate time system with units of Weeks and Seconds. GPS Time is offset from UTC time by

an integer number of seconds.

IP Address

An Internet Protocol Address is a series of numbers that identifies a specific computer.

Kalman Filter

A Kalman Filter is an algorithm that refines imprecise data to provide a more accurate estimate of a

system’s current state.

NMEA

National Marine Electronics Association. NMEA is a standard for interfacing electronic devices. This

standard includes the definition of specific message formats.

Point of Validity

The Point of Validity defines the geographical location to which a particular set of data applies.

Post-Processing

Non real-time navigation solution computation from previously collected and recorded raw sensor

data.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

POS-GPS Timing

Pound

The pound (avoirdupois) or international pound is the mass unit defined as exactly 0.45359237

kilograms (or 453.59237 grams). It is part of the avoirdupois system of mass units. There are 16

ounces in a pound (avoirdupois). The pound is equal to exactly 7000 grains, where a grain is officially

defined as exactly 0.06479891 gram. The legal definition of the pound in the United Kingdom and

Canada are the same as in the United States, and were unified to their current value in 1960.

PPS Mode

Precise Positioning Service capable GNSS receivers have higher accuracy than C/A code receivers,

but are currently only available for military use.

PPS Strobe

The Pulse per Second Strobe is a TTL-level signal; generated once per second, whose falling edge is

coincident with the GNSS second.

Pseudo-range

A GNSS distance measurement that has not been corrected for differences in synchronization

between the satellite and receiver clocks.

TCP/IP

TCP/IP is a routable protocol, and the TCP part provides transport functions, which ensures that the

total amount of bytes sent is received correctly at the other end.

The IP part of TCP/IP provides the routing capability. In a routable protocol, all messages contain not

only the address of the destination station, but the address of a destination network. This allows

TCP/IP messages to be sent to multiple networks within an organization or around the world, hence its

use in the worldwide Internet. Every client and server in a TCP/IP network requires an IP address that

is either permanently assigned or dynamically assigned at start-up.

Time of Validity

Time of Validity defines the exact time at which a particular set of data are current.

TTL Level Signal

TTL Level Signals are DC signals interpreted in a discrete fashion. A signal below 0.8V is interpreted

as a LOW, and a signal above 3.3V is interpreted as a HIGH. TTL signals can be likened to a binary

system, where LOW is equivalent to 0, and HIGH is equivalent to 1.

UDP

UDP is a collection of protocols similar to TCP/IP. Most notable among the differences is that data

broadcast in UDP can be read by any computer on the network. In contrast, TCP/IP messages are

directed at particular computer.

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

POS-GPS Timing

UTC

Coordinated Universal Time is a precise atomic time system, offset from GPS Time by an integer

number of seconds. Also known as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

INDEX

1PPS

message, H-3

Assembly Procedures, 9-19

GNSS antenna, 9-22

GNSS antenna cable, 9-23

IMU, 9-20, 9-24

IMU cable, 9-23

AutoLog, 5-13

AutoRecovery, 1-10, 5-10

AutoStart, 1-4, 1-11, 4-3, 4-13, 5-17, 5-24

enable, 4-13

Auxiliary GNSS Receiver, 2-23

Binary Formats, 3-16

Binary String Formats

Atlas, 3-20

Simrad 1000, 3-17

Simrad 3000, 3-18

TSM 5265, 3-19

TSS1, 3-16

Cables

ANT, 2-23

COM ports, 2-11, 2-18

digital, 2-18

Ethernet port, 2-21

GPS ports, 2-20

IMU, 2-16

LAN port, 2-21

PCS, 2-13

power, 2-16

Change Parameters, 4-27

COM Port Settings, 3-1

COM Ports, 2-18

default configuration, 2-12, 2-18, 2-20

Component Descriptions, 9-1

GNSS antennas, 9-2

IMU, 9-2

PSC, 9-2

Configuration, 4-7

automatic, 4-9

GNSS, 4-17, 8-1

antenna calibration, 4-18

parameter correction, 4-23

GNSS reset, 8-1

initial, 4-7

AutoStart, 4-13

heave filter, 4-15

parameters, 4-8

save settings, 4-17

Connector Summary

rack mount, 2-10

Control Port, 2-22

Controller, 4-3

accuracy pane, 5-5

heave, 5-6

attitude pane, 5-5

dynamics pane, 5-5

events pane, 5-6

faults window, 5-8

GAMS, 5-17

hardware requirements, D-2

installation, D-1

IP address, 4-4

Index-2

load configurations, 4-27

main window, 5-2

position pane, 5-5

save configurations, 4-27

save settings, 4-26

sensor data window, 5-7

attitude pane, 5-7

dynamics pane, 5-8

heave field, 5-8

position pane, 5-7

velocity pane, 5-8

wander angle field, 5-8

software requirements, D-2

speed pane, 5-6

status pane

GAMS, 5-5

IMU status, 5-4

nav status, 5-4

POS mode, 5-4

velocity pane, 5-5

Data Logging, 5-10

AutoLog, 5-13

Ethernet, 1-12, 5-15

USB flash drive, 5-12

Data Ouput

start, Ethernet, 5-16

Data Port, 2-22

Diagnostics, 8-2

control, 8-3

display, 8-4

Display Port, 2-22

Environmental

GNSS antenna, 2-3

IMU, 2-4

PCS, 2-4

Ethernet

control port, 3-1

display port, 3-1

logging data port, 3-1

real-time data port, 3-1

Ethernet Port, 2-21

cables, 2-21

signal format, 2-22

Fault Finding, 9-3

fault detection window, 9-4

fault warning messages, 9-14

indicators, 9-3

message log, 9-9

Fault Identification, 9-1

FDIR, 1-10, 5-10

Functions

POS MV V4, 1-9

Galvanic Corrosion, 2-4

GAMS, 4-18

abnormal behaviour, 5-19

normal operation, 5-17

operation with, 1-8

operation without, 1-6

overview, 1-5

parameter setup, 5-23

stand-alone operation, 5-24

GNSS

configuration, 4-17, 8-1

reset, 8-1

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

GNSS Antenna

Applanix, 2-6

GNSS Antennas

cables, 2-23

GNSS Receiver Subsystem, 1-5

GPS Ports, 2-20

Grounding

19-Inch Rack Mount, 2-4, 8-4, 9-1

mPOS, 2-4, 8-4, 9-1

Handling, 2-1

GNSS antenna, 2-1

IMU, 2-1

PCS, 2-1

Heave

trueheave, 1-10

trueheave operation, 6-1

IMU

cable, 2-16

IMU Subsystem, 1-4

Inertial/GNSS Integration

loosely coupled, 1-2

tightly coupled, 1-2

Install

GNSS antenna, 2-6

GNSS system, 2-4

IMU, 2-7

mPOS

PCS, 2-13

rack mount

PCS, 2-9

PCS cables, 2-9

Installation Checklist, 2-32

Installation Parameters, 2-24

checklist, 2-32

lever arm distance, 2-24, 2-26

mounting angle, 2-25

mounting angles, 2-29

reference to -

aux GNSS lever arm, 2-28

GNSS lever arm, 2-27

heave lever arm, 2-28

IMU lever arm, 2-26

sensor 1 lever arm, 2-27

sensor 2 lever arm, 2-27

vessel lever arm, 2-27

Interface

ANT, 2-23

COM ports, 2-11

Interfaces

POS MV V4, 1-12

IP Address

changing, 4-5

LAN Port, 2-21

cables, 2-21

signal format, 2-22

Lever Arms, 2-24

Light

Logging, 4-3, 9-4

Power, 4-3, 9-4

SYS, 4-2, 9-4

Logging

start, Ethernet, 5-15

stop, Ethernet, 5-15

Logging Status Light, 4-3, 9-4

LV-POSView

logging, 5-11

Index-4

ethernet, 5-15

Removable Media, 5-13

settings menu

I/O ports, 4-13

Maintenance, 8-4

GNSS antenna, 8-5

IMU, 8-4

PCS, 8-5

Mounting Angles, 2-25, 2-29

frames of reference, 2-30

right-hand orthogonal, 2-30

Tate-Bryant rotation, 2-29

wrt to reference frame -

IMU, 2-32

sensor 1, 2-32

sensor 2, 2-32

Navigate Mode, 1-11, 4-3, 4-13, 4-20, 5-4, 5-17,

9-4, 9-29

NMEA Formats, 3-2

NMEA Sentence Formats

$INGGA, 3-3

$INGGK, 3-5

$INGST, 3-7

$INHDT, 3-6

$INVTG, 3-7

$INZDA, 3-12

$PASHR, 3-10

$PRDID, 3-11

$UTC, 3-12, 3-13

UTC, 3-14

Operating Modes, 1-4

Password Protection, 4-27

PCS Subsystem, 1-4

Port Formats, 3-1

Ethernet, 3-1

LAN, 3-1

Port Settings, 3-1

COM, 3-1

GNSS, 3-23

POS Config Utility, 4-28

POS Timing, H-4

Power, 2-3

both systems

power-off, 4-26

GNSS antenna, 2-3

IMU, 2-3

mPOS

power-off, 4-26

PCS, 2-3

power-off, 4-24

power-on, 4-1

rack mount

power-off, 4-25

power-on, 4-1

Power Status Light, 4-3, 9-4

PPS, 2-18, 2-20

PPS Ports

signal format, 2-21

RTK, 2-28

Sensors, 1-2

Software

MV-POSView Controller, D-1

POSConfig, D-2

POSLoader, D-1

POS MV V5 Installation and Operation Guide

requirements, 1-13

Sonar, 2-23

Specifications, 7-1

Standby Mode, 1-4, 4-3, 4-13

Storage, 2-2

Support, A-1

SYS Status Light, 4-2, 9-4

System Overview, 1-1

POS MV V5 Installation And Operation Guide Applanix Manual

Applanix_POS_MV_-_Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation